initial commit of ebook 21466HEADmain

1 files changed, 6937 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/21466.txt b/21466.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a5ca5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21466.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6937 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of In the Rocky Mountains, by W. H. G. Kingston
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: In the Rocky Mountains
+
+Author: W. H. G. Kingston
+
+Illustrator: J.F.
+
+Release Date: May 15, 2007 [EBook #21466]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+
+
+
+In the Rocky Mountains, by W H G Kingston.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+This is a very nicely written little book.  It is easy to read or listen
+to, yet is full of real-sounding dangerous situations from which the
+young heroes escape with difficulty.
+
+The hero and his sister, Ralph and Clarice, are from a farming family in
+the middle states of America.  The father, unwillingly followed by the
+mother, decide to move to the west, but unfortunately first the mother,
+and then the father, dies, and the two young people are left without an
+adult to guide and lead them.  Luckily, at that moment, a wagon train
+comes by, and the children hail it.  The man in charge of the wagon
+train realises he is actually the uncle of these children, and agrees to
+take them with him, becoming their greatly beloved Uncle Jeff.
+
+Much of the rest of the book is taken up with various confrontations
+with Indians, with wolves and a bear or two thrown in for good measure.
+
+You will enjoy reading this book, and it certainly converts well to an
+audiobook so that you can listen to it.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+IN THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS, BY W H G KINGSTON.
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE.
+
+HOW UNCLE JEFF CAME TO "ROARING WATER"--THE SITUATION OF THE FARM--THE
+INMATES OF THE HOUSE--MY SISTER CLARICE AND BLACK RACHEL--UNCLE JEFF--
+BARTLE WON AND GIDEON TUTTLE--ARRIVAL OF LIEUTENANT BROADSTREET AND HIS
+MEN--THE TROOPERS QUARTERED IN THE HUT--OUR FARM-LABOURERS--SUDDEN
+APPEARANCE OF THE REDSKIN WINNEMAK--HIS FORMER VISIT TO THE FARM--
+CLARICE ENCOUNTERS HIM AT THE SPRING--BADLY WOUNDED--KINDLY TREATED BY
+CLARICE AND RACHEL--HIS GRATITUDE.
+
+We were most of us seated round a blazing fire of pine logs, which
+crackled away merrily, sending the sparks about in all directions, at
+the no small risk of setting fire to garments of a lighter texture than
+ours.  Although the flowers were blooming on the hill-sides, in the
+woods and valleys, and by the margins of the streams; humming-birds were
+flitting about gathering their dainty food; and the bears, having
+finished the operation of licking their paws, had come out in search of
+more substantial fare; and the buffalo had been seen migrating to the
+north,--the wind at night blew keenly from off the snow-capped
+mountain-tops which, at no great distance, rose above us, and rendered a
+fire acceptable even to us hardy backwoodsmen.
+
+Our location was far in advance of any settlement in that latitude of
+North America, for Uncle Jeff Crockett "could never abide," he averred,
+"being in the rear of his fellow-creatures."  Whenever he had before
+found people gathering around him at the spot where he had pitched his
+tent, or rather, put up his log-hut, he had sold his property (always to
+advantage, however), and yoking his team, had pushed on westward, with a
+few sturdy followers.
+
+On and on he had come, until he had reached the base of the Rocky
+Mountains.  He would have gone over them, but, having an eye to
+business, and knowing that it was necessary to secure a market for his
+produce, he calculated that he had come far enough for the present.  He
+therefore climbed the sides of the mountain for a short distance, until
+he entered a sort of canon, which, penetrating westward, greatly
+narrowed, until it had the appearance of a cleft with lofty crags on
+either side,--while it opened out eastward, overlooking the broad valley
+and the plain beyond.
+
+He chose the spot as one capable of being defended against the Redskins,
+never in those parts very friendly to white men,--especially towards
+those whom they found settling themselves on lands which they looked
+upon as their own hunting-grounds, although they could use them for no
+other purpose.
+
+Another reason which had induced Uncle Jeff to select this spot was,
+that not far off was one of the only practicable passes through the
+mountains either to the north or south, and that the trail to it led
+close below us at the foot of the hills, so that every emigrant train or
+party of travellers going to or from the Great Salt Lake or California
+must pass in sight of the house.
+
+A stream, issuing from the heights above, fell over the cliffs, forming
+a roaring cataract; and then, rushing through the canon, made its way
+down into the valley, irrigating and fertilising the ground, until it
+finally reached a large river, the Platte, flowing into the Missouri.
+From this cataract our location obtained its name of "Roaring Water;"
+but it was equally well-known as "Uncle Jeff's Farm."
+
+Our neighbours, if such they could be called in this wild region, were
+"birds of passage."  Now and then a few Indian families might fix their
+tents in the valley below; or a party of hunters or trappers might
+bivouac a night or two under the shelter of the woods, scattered here
+and there; or travellers bound east or west might encamp by the margin
+of the river for the sake of recruiting their cattle, or might
+occasionally seek for shelter at the log-house which they saw perched
+above them, where, in addition to comfortable quarters, abundant fare
+and a hospitable welcome--which Uncle Jeff never refused to any one,
+whoever he might be, who came to his door--were sure to be obtained.
+
+But it is time that I should say something about the inmates of the
+house at the period I am describing.
+
+First, there was Uncle Jeff Crockett, a man of about forty-five, with a
+tall, stalwart figure, and a handsome countenance (though scarred by a
+slash from a tomahawk, and the claws of a bear with which he had had a
+desperate encounter).  A bright blue eye betokened a keen sight, as also
+that his rifle was never likely to miss its aim; while his well-knit
+frame gave assurance of great activity and endurance.
+
+I was then about seventeen, and Uncle Jeff had more than once
+complimented me by remarking that "I was a true chip of the old block,"
+as like what he was when at my age as two peas, and that he had no fear
+but that I should do him credit; so that I need not say any more about
+myself.
+
+I must say something, however, about my sister Clarice, who was my
+junior by rather more than a year.  Fair as a lily she was, in spite of
+summer suns, from which she took but little pains to shelter herself;
+but they had failed even to freckle her clear skin, or darken her light
+hair--except, it might be, that from them it obtained the golden hue
+which tinged it.  Delicate as she looked, she took an active part in all
+household duties, and was now busy about some of them at the further end
+of the big hall, which served as our common sitting-room, workshop,
+kitchen, and often as a sleeping-room, when guests were numerous.  She
+was assisted by Rachel Prentiss, a middle-aged negress, the only other
+woman in the establishment; who took upon herself the out-door work and
+rougher duties, with the exception of tending the poultry and milking
+the cows, in which Clarice also engaged.
+
+I have not yet described the rest of the party round the fire.  There
+was Bartle Won, a faithful follower, for many years, of Uncle Jeff; but
+as unlike him as it was possible that any two human beings could be.
+Bartle was a wiry little fellow, with bow legs, broad shoulders (one
+rather higher than the other), and a big head, out of which shone a pair
+of grey eyes, keen as those of a hawk--the only point in which he
+resembled Uncle Jeff.  He was wonderfully active and strong,
+notwithstanding his figure; and as for fatigue, he did not know what it
+meant.  He could go days without eating or drinking; although, when he
+did get food, he certainly made ample amends for his abstinence.  He was
+no great runner; but when once on the back of a horse, no animal,
+however vicious and up to tricks, had been able to dislodge him.
+
+Gideon Tuttle was another faithful follower of Uncle Jeff: he was a
+hardy backwoodsman, whose gleaming axe had laid many monarchs of the
+forest low.  Though only of moderate height, few men could equal him in
+strength.  He could fell an ox with his fist, and hold down by the horns
+a young bull, however furious.  He had had several encounters with
+bears; and although on two occasions only armed with a knife, he had
+come off victorious.  His nerve and activity equalled his strength.  He
+was no great talker, and he was frequently morose and ill-tempered; but
+he had one qualification which compensated for all his other
+deficiencies--he was devotedly attached to Uncle Jeff.
+
+There were engaged on the farm, besides these, four other hands: an
+Irishman, a Spaniard, a negro, and a half-breed, who lived by themselves
+in a rough hut near the house.  Although Uncle Jeff was a great advocate
+for liberty and equality, he had no fancy to have these fellows
+in-doors; their habits and language not being such as to make close
+intimacy pleasant.
+
+The two old followers of Uncle Jeff--although they would have laughed at
+the notion of being called gentlemen--were clean in their persons, and
+careful in their conversation, especially in the presence of Clarice.
+
+Just before sunset that evening, our party had been increased by the
+arrival of an officer of the United States army and four men, who were
+on their way from Fort Laramie to Fort Harwood, on the other side of the
+mountains; but they had been deserted by their Indian guide, and having
+been unable to find the entrance to the pass, were well-nigh worn out
+with fatigue and vexation when they caught sight of Roaring Water Farm.
+
+The officer and his men were received with a hearty welcome.
+
+"There is food enough in the store, and we will make a shake-down for
+you in this room," said Uncle Jeff, wringing the hand of the officer in
+his usual style.
+
+The latter introduced himself as Lieutenant Manley Broadstreet.  He was
+a fine-looking young fellow, scarcely older than I was; but he had
+already seen a great deal of service in border warfare with the Indians,
+as well as in Florida and Texas.
+
+"You are welcome here, friends," said Uncle Jeff, who, as I have said,
+was no respecter of persons, and made little distinction between the
+lieutenant and his men.
+
+At this Lieutenant Broadstreet demurred, and, as he glanced at Clarice,
+inquired whether there was any building near in which the men could be
+lodged.
+
+"They are not very fit company for a young lady," he remarked aside.
+
+He did not, however, object to the sergeant joining him; and the other
+three men were accordingly ordered to take up their quarters at the hut,
+with its motley inhabitants.
+
+Their appearance, I confess, somewhat reminded me of Falstaff's "ragged
+regiment."  The three varied wonderfully in height.  The tallest was not
+only tall, but thin in the extreme, his ankles protruding below his
+trousers, and his wrists beyond the sleeves of his jacket; he had lost
+his military hat, and had substituted for it a high beaver, which he had
+obtained from some Irish emigrant on the road.  He was a German; and his
+name, he told me, was Karl Klitz.  The shortest of the party, Barnaby
+Gillooly, was also by far the fattest; indeed, it seemed surprising
+that, with his obese figure, he could undergo the fatigue he must
+constantly have been called upon to endure.  He seemed to be a jolly,
+merry fellow notwithstanding, as he showed by breaking into a hearty
+laugh as Klitz, stumbling over a log, fell with his long neck and
+shoulders on the one side, and his heels kicking up in the air on the
+other.  The last man was evidently a son of Erin, from the few words he
+uttered in a rich brogue, which had not deteriorated by long absence
+from home and country.  He certainly presented a more soldierly
+appearance than did his two comrades, but the ruddy blue hue of his nose
+and lips showed that when liquor was to be obtained he was not likely to
+let it pass his lips untasted.
+
+The three soldiers were welcomed by the inhabitants of the hut, who were
+glad to have strangers with whom they could chat, and who could bring
+them news from the Eastern States.
+
+On coming back to the house, after conducting the three men to the hut,
+I found the lieutenant and his sergeant, Silas Custis, seated before the
+fire; the young lieutenant every now and then, as was not surprising,
+casting a glance at Clarice.  But she was too busily occupied in getting
+the supper-table ready to notice the admiration she was inspiring.
+
+Rachel, with frying-pan in hand, now made her way towards the fire, and
+begging those who impeded her movements to draw on one side, she
+commenced her culinary operations.  She soon had a huge dish of rashers
+of bacon ready; while a couple of pots were carried off to be emptied of
+their contents; and some cakes, which had been cooking under the ashes,
+were withdrawn, and placed hot and smoking on the platter.
+
+"All ready, genl'em," exclaimed Rachel; "you can fall to when you like."
+
+The party got up, and we took our seats at the table.  Clarice, who
+until a short time before had been assisting Rachel, now returned--
+having been away to arrange her toilet.  She took her usual seat at the
+head of the table; and the lieutenant, to his evident satisfaction,
+found himself placed near her.  He spoke in a pleasant, gentlemanly
+tone, and treated Clarice in every respect as a young lady,--as, indeed,
+she was.  He now and then addressed me; and the more he said, the more I
+felt inclined to like him.
+
+Uncle Jeff had a good deal of conversation with Sergeant Custis, who
+appeared to be a superior sort of person, and had, I suspect, seen
+better days.
+
+We were still seated at supper when the door opened and an Indian
+stalked into the room, decked with war-paint and feathers, and rifle in
+hand.
+
+"Ugh!" he exclaimed, stopping and regarding us, as if unwilling to
+advance without permission.
+
+"Come in, friend," said Uncle Jeff, rising and going towards him; "sit
+down, and make yourself at home.  You would like some food, I guess?"
+
+The Indian again uttered a significant "Ugh!" as, taking advantage of
+Uncle Jeff's offer, he seated himself by the fire.
+
+"Why, uncle," exclaimed Clarice, "it is Winnemak!"
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+But I must explain how Clarice came to know the Indian, whom, at the
+first moment, no one else had recognised.
+
+Not far off, in a grove of cottonwood trees up the valley, there came
+forth from the side of the hill a spring of singularly bright and cool
+water, of which Uncle Jeff was particularly fond; as were, indeed, the
+rest of us.  Clarice made it a practice every evening, just before we
+returned home from our day's work, to fetch a large pitcher of water
+from this spring, that we might have it as cool and fresh as possible.
+
+It happened that one afternoon, in the spring of the previous year, she
+had set off with this object in view, telling Rachel where she was
+going; but she had just got out of the enclosure when she caught sight
+of one of the cows straying up the valley.
+
+"I go after her, Missie Clarice; you no trouble you-self," cried Rachel.
+
+So Clarice continued her way, carrying her pitcher on her head.  It was
+somewhat earlier than usual; and having no especial work to attend to at
+home, she did not hurry.  It was as warm a day as any in summer, and
+finding the heat somewhat oppressive, she sat down by the side of the
+pool to enjoy the refreshing coolness of the air which came down the
+canon.  "I ought to be going home," she said to herself; and taking her
+pitcher, she filled it with water.
+
+She was just about to replace it on her head, when she was startled by
+the well-known Indian "Ugh!" uttered by some one who was as yet
+invisible.  She at first felt a little alarmed, but recollecting that if
+the stranger had been an enemy he would not have given her warning, she
+stood still, with her pitcher in her hand, looking around her.
+Presently an Indian appeared from among the bushes, his dress torn and
+travel-stained, and his haggard looks showing that he must have
+undergone great fatigue.  He made signs, as he approached, to show that
+he had come over the mountains; he then pointed to his lips, to let her
+understand that he was parched with thirst.
+
+"Poor man! you shall have some water, then," said Clarice, immediately
+holding up the pitcher, that the stranger might drink without
+difficulty.  His looks brightened as she did so; and after he had drunk
+his fill he gave her back the pitcher, drawing a long breath, and
+placing his hand on his heart to express his gratitude.
+
+While the Indian was drinking, Clarice observed Rachel approaching, with
+a look of alarm on her countenance.  It vanished, however, when she saw
+how Clarice and the Indian were employed.
+
+"Me dare say de stranger would like food as well as drink," she observed
+as she joined them, and making signs to the Indian to inquire if he was
+hungry.
+
+He nodded his head, and uttered some words.  But although neither
+Clarice nor Rachel could understand his language, they saw very clearly
+that he greatly required food.
+
+"Come along, den," said Rachel; "you shall hab some in de twinkle ob an
+eye, as soon as we get home.--Missie Clarice, me carry de pitcher, or
+Indian fancy you white slavey;" and Rachel laughed at her own wit.
+
+She then told Clarice how she had caught sight of the Indian coming over
+the mountain, as she was driving home the cow; and that, as he was
+making his way towards the spring, she had been dreadfully alarmed at
+the idea that he might surprise her young mistress.  She thought it
+possible, too, that he might be accompanied by other Redskins, and that
+they should perhaps carry her off; or, at all events, finding the house
+undefended, they might pillage it, and get away with their booty before
+the return of the men.
+
+"But he seems friendly and well-disposed," said Clarice, looking at the
+Indian; "and even if he had not been suffering from hunger and thirst, I
+do not think he would have been inclined to do us any harm.  The
+Redskins are not all bad; and many, I fear, have been driven, by the ill
+treatment they have received from white men, to retaliate, and have
+obtained a worse character than they deserve."
+
+"Dere are bad red men, and bad white men, and bad black men; but, me
+tink, not so many ob de last," said Rachel, who always stuck up for her
+own race.
+
+The red man seemed to fancy that they were talking about him; and he
+tried to smile, but failed in the attempt.  It was with difficulty, too,
+he could drag on his weary limbs.
+
+As soon as they reached the house Rachel made him sit down; and within a
+minute or two a basin of broth was placed before him, at which she blew
+away until her cheeks almost cracked, in an endeavour to cool it, that
+he might the more speedily set to.  He assisted her, as far as his
+strength would allow, in the operation; and then placing the basin to
+his lips, he eagerly drained off its contents, without making use of the
+wooden spoon with which she had supplied him.
+
+"Dat just to keep body and soul togedder, till somet'ing more 'stantial
+ready for you," she said.
+
+Clarice had in the meantime been preparing some venison steaks, which,
+with some cakes from the oven, were devoured by the Indian with the same
+avidity with which he had swallowed the broth.  But although the food
+considerably revived him, he still showed evident signs of exhaustion;
+so Rachel, placing a buffalo robe in the corner of the room, invited him
+to lie down and rest.  He staggered towards it, and in a few minutes his
+heavy breathing showed that he was asleep.
+
+Uncle Jeff was somewhat astonished, when he came in, on seeing the
+Indian; but he approved perfectly of what Clarice and Rachel had done.
+
+"To my mind," he observed, "when these Redskins choose to be enemies, we
+must treat them as enemies, and shoot them down, or they will be having
+our scalps; but if they wish to be friends, we should treat them as
+friends, and do them all the good we can."
+
+Uncle Jeff forgot just then that we ought to do good to our enemies as
+well as to our friends; but that would be a difficult matter for a man
+to accomplish when a horde of savages are in arms, resolved to take his
+life; so I suppose it means that we must do them good when we can get
+them to be at peace--or to bury the war-hatchet, as they would express
+themselves.
+
+The Indian slept on, although he groaned occasionally as if in pain,--
+nature then asserting its sway, though, had he been awake, he probably
+would have given no sign of what he was suffering.
+
+"I suspect the man must be wounded," observed Uncle Jeff.  "It will be
+better not to disturb him."
+
+We had had supper, and the things were being cleared away, when, on
+going to look at the Indian, I saw that his eyes were open, and that he
+was gazing round him, astonished at seeing so many people.
+
+"He is awake," I observed; and Clarice, coming up, made signs to inquire
+whether he would have some more food.
+
+He shook his head, and lay back again, evidently unable to sit up.
+
+Just then Uncle Jeff, who had been out, returned.
+
+"I suspect that he is one of the Kaskayas, whose hunting-grounds are
+between this and the Platte," observed Uncle Jeff; and approaching the
+Indian, he stooped over him and spoke a few words in the dialect of the
+tribe he had mentioned.
+
+The Indian answered him, although with difficulty.
+
+"I thought so," said Uncle Jeff.  "He has been badly wounded by an arrow
+in the side, and although he managed to cut it out and bind up the hurt,
+he confesses that he still suffers greatly.  Here, Bartle, you are the
+best doctor among us," he added, turning to Won, who was at work mending
+some harness on the opposite side of the room; "see what you can do for
+the poor fellow."
+
+Bartle put down the straps upon which he was engaged, and joined us,
+while Clarice retired.  Uncle Jeff and Bartle then examined the Indian's
+side.
+
+"I will get some leaves to bind over the wound to-morrow morning, which
+will quickly heal it; and, in the meantime, we will see if Rachel has
+not got some of the ointment which helped to cure Gideon when he cut
+himself so badly with his axe last spring."
+
+Rachel, who prided herself on her ointment, quickly produced a jar of
+it, and assisted Bartle in dressing the Indian's wound.  She then gave
+him a cooling mixture which she had concocted.
+
+The Indian expressed his gratitude in a few words, and again covering
+himself up with a buffalo robe, was soon asleep.
+
+The next morning he was better, but still unable to move.
+
+He remained with us ten days, during which Clarice and Rachel watched
+over him with the greatest care, making him all sorts of dainty dishes
+which they thought he would like; and in that time he and Uncle Jeff
+managed to understand each other pretty well.
+
+The Indian, according to the reticent habits of his people, was not
+inclined to be very communicative at first as to how he had received his
+wound; but as his confidence increased he owned that he had, with a
+party of his braves, made an excursion to the southward to attack their
+old enemies the Arrapahas, but that he and his followers had been
+overwhelmed by greatly superior numbers.  His people had been cut off to
+a man, and himself badly wounded.  He had managed, however, to make his
+escape to the mountains without being observed by his foes.  As he knew
+that they were on the watch for him, he was afraid of returning to the
+plains, and had kept on the higher ground, where he had suffered greatly
+from hunger and thirst, until he had at length fallen in with Clarice at
+the spring.
+
+At last he was able to move about; and his wound having completely
+healed, he expressed his wish to return to his people.
+
+"Winnemak will ever be grateful for the kindness shown him by the
+Palefaces," he said, as he was wishing us good-bye.  "A time may come
+when he may be able to show what he feels; he is one who never forgets
+his friends, although he may be far away from them."
+
+"We shall be happy to see you whenever you come this way," said Uncle
+Jeff; "but as for doing us any good, why, we do not exactly expect that.
+We took care of you, as we should take care of any one who happened to
+be in distress and wanted assistance, whether a Paleface or a Redskin."
+
+Winnemak now went round among us, shaking each person by the hand.  When
+he came to Clarice he stopped, and spoke to her for some time,--
+although, of course, she could not understand a word he said.
+
+Uncle Jeff, who was near, made out that he was telling her he had a
+daughter of her age, and that he should very much like to make them
+known to each other.  "My child is called Maysotta, the `White Lily;'
+though, when she sees you, she will say that that name ought to be
+yours," he added.
+
+Clarice asked Uncle Jeff to tell Winnemak that she should be very glad
+to become acquainted with Maysotta whenever he could bring her to the
+farm.
+
+Uncle Jeff was so pleased with the Indian, that he made him a present of
+a rifle and a stock of ammunition; telling him that he was sure he would
+ever be ready to use it in the service of his friends.
+
+Winnemak's gratitude knew no bounds, and he expressed himself far more
+warmly than Indians are accustomed to do.  Then bidding us farewell, he
+took his way to the north-east.
+
+"I know these Indians pretty well," observed Bartle, as Winnemak
+disappeared in the distance.  "We may see his face again when he wants
+powder and shot, but he will not trouble himself to come back until
+then."
+
+We had begun to fancy that Bartle was right, for many months went by and
+we saw nothing of our Indian friend.  Our surprise, therefore, was
+great, when he made his appearance in the manner I have described in an
+earlier portion of the chapter.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO.
+
+WINNEMAK WARNS US OF THE APPROACH OF INDIANS--BARTLE GOES OUT TO SCOUT--
+NO SIGNS OF A FOE--I TAKE THE LIEUTENANT TO VISIT "ROARING WATER"--
+BARTLE REPORTS THAT THE ENEMY HAVE TURNED BACK--THE LIEUTENANT DELAYED
+BY THE SERGEANT'S ILLNESS--THE VISIT TO THE HUT--A TIPSY TROOPER--KLITZ
+AND GILLOOLY MISSING--THE LIEUTENANT BECOMES WORSE--SEARCH FOR THE
+MISSING MEN--I OFFER TO ACT AS GUIDE TO THE LIEUTENANT--BARTLE
+UNDERTAKES TO FIND OUT WHAT HAS BECOME OF KLITZ AND BARNEY.
+
+"Glad to see you, friend!" said Uncle Jeff, getting up and taking the
+Indian by the hand.  "What brings you here?"
+
+"To prove that Winnemak has not forgotten the kindness shown him by the
+Palefaces," was the answer.  "He has come to warn his friends, who sleep
+in security, that their enemies are on the war-path, and will ere long
+attempt to take their scalps."
+
+"They had better not try that game," said Uncle Jeff; "if they do, they
+will find that they have made a mistake."
+
+"The Redskins fight not as do the Palefaces; they try to take their
+enemies by surprise," answered Winnemak.  "They will wait until they can
+find the white men scattered about over the farm, when they will swoop
+down upon them like the eagle on its prey; or when all are slumbering
+within, they will creep up to the house, and attack it before there is
+time for defence."
+
+"Much obliged for your warning, friend," said Uncle Jeff; "but I should
+like to know more about these enemies, and where they are to be found.
+We might manage to turn the tables, and be down upon them when they
+fancy that we are all slumbering in security, and thus put them to the
+right-about."
+
+"They are approaching as stealthily as the snake in the grass," answered
+Winnemak.  "Unless you can get on their trail, it will be no easy matter
+to find them."
+
+"Who are these enemies you speak of; and how do you happen to know that
+they are coming to attack us?" asked Uncle Jeff, who generally suspected
+all Indian reports, and fancied that Winnemak was merely repeating what
+he had heard, or, for some reason of his own--perhaps to gain credit to
+himself--had come to warn us of a danger which had no real existence.
+
+"I was leading forth my braves to revenge the loss we suffered last
+year, when our scouts brought word that they had fallen in with a large
+war-party of Arrapahas and Apaches, far too numerous for our small band
+to encounter with any chance of success.  We accordingly retreated,
+watching for an opportunity to attack any parties of the enemy who might
+become separated from the larger body.  They also sent out their scouts,
+and one of these we captured.  My braves were about to put him to death,
+but I promised him his liberty if he would tell me the object of the
+expedition.  Being a man who was afraid to die, he told us that the
+party consisted of his own tribe and the Apaches, who had been joined by
+some Spanish Palefaces; and that their object was not to make war on
+either the Kaskayas or the Pawnees, but to rob a wealthy settler living
+on the side of the mountains, as well as any other white men they might
+find located in the neighbourhood.  Feeling sure that their evil designs
+were against my friends, I directed my people to follow me, while I
+hastened forward to give you due warning of what is likely to happen.
+As they are very numerous, and have among them firearms and ammunition,
+it may be a hard task, should they attack the house, to beat them off."
+
+Such in substance was the information Winnemak brought us.
+
+"To my mind, the fellows will never dare to come so far north as this;
+or, if they do, they will think twice about it before they venture to
+attack our farm," answered Uncle Jeff.
+
+"A wise man is prepared for anything which can possibly happen," said
+the Indian.  "What is there to stop them?  They are too numerous to be
+successfully opposed by any force of white men in these parts; and my
+braves are not willing to throw away their lives to no purpose."
+
+Uncle Jeff thought the matter over.  "I will send out a trusty scout to
+ascertain who these people are, and what they are about," he said at
+length.  "If they are coming this way, we shall get ready to receive
+them; and if not, we need not further trouble ourselves."
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet, who held the Indians cheap, was very much
+inclined to doubt the truth of the account brought by Winnemak, but he
+agreed that Uncle Jeff's plan was a prudent one.
+
+Bartle Won immediately volunteered to start off to try and find the
+whereabouts of the supposed marauding party.  His offer was at once
+accepted; and before many minutes were over he had left the farm, armed
+with his trusty rifle, and his axe and hunting-knife in his belt.
+
+"Take care they do not catch you," observed the lieutenant.
+
+"If you knew Bartle, you would not give him such advice," said Uncle
+Jeff.  "He is not the boy to be caught napping by Redskins; he is more
+likely to lay a dozen of them low than lose his own scalp."
+
+The Indian seeing Bartle go, took his leave, saying that he would join
+his own people, who were to encamp, according to his orders, near a wood
+in the valley below.  He too intended to keep a watch on the enemy; and
+should he ascertain that they were approaching, he would, he said, give
+us warning.
+
+"We can trust to your assistance, should we be attacked," said Uncle
+Jeff; "or, if you will come with your people inside the house, you may
+help us in defending it."
+
+Winnemak shook his head at the latter proposal.
+
+"We will aid you as far as we can with our small party," he answered;
+"but my people would never consent to shut themselves up within walls.
+They do not understand that sort of fighting.  Trust to Winnemak; he
+will do all he can to serve you."
+
+"We are very certain of that, friend," said Uncle Jeff.
+
+The Indian, after once more shaking hands with us, set off to join his
+tribe.
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet expressed his satisfaction at having come to the
+farm.  "If you are attacked, my four men and I may be of some use to
+you; for I feel sure that we shall quickly drive away the Redskins,
+however numerous they may be," he observed.
+
+He advised that all the doors and lower windows should be barricaded, in
+case a surprise might be attempted; and that guards should be posted,
+and another scout sent out to keep watch near the house, in case Bartle
+might have missed the enemy, or any accident have happened to him.  The
+latter Uncle Jeff deemed very unnecessary, so great was his confidence
+in Bartle's judgment and activity.
+
+Notice was sent to the hut directing the men to come in should they be
+required, but it was not considered necessary for them to sleep inside
+the house.
+
+These arrangements having been made, those not on watch retired to rest.
+But although Uncle Jeff took things so coolly, I suspect that he was
+rather more anxious than he wished it to appear.  I know that I myself
+kept awake the greater part of the night, listening for any sounds which
+might indicate the approach of a foe, and ready to set out at a moment's
+notice with my rifle in hand,--which I had carefully loaded and placed
+by my bedside before I lay down.  Several times I started up, fancying
+that I heard a distant murmur; but it was simply the roaring of the
+cataract coming down the canon.
+
+At daybreak I jumped up, and quickly dressing, went downstairs.  Soon
+afterwards Gideon Tuttle, who had been scouting near the house, came in,
+stating that he had seen no light to the southward which would indicate
+the camp-fires of an enemy, and that, according to his belief, none was
+likely to appear.  In this Uncle Jeff was inclined to agree with him.
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet now expressed a wish to proceed on his way; at
+the same time, he said that he did not like to leave us until it was
+certain that we were not likely to be exposed to danger.
+
+"Much obliged to you, friend," said Uncle Jeff, "you are welcome to stay
+here as long as you please; and Bartle Won will soon be in, when we
+shall know all about the state of affairs."
+
+It was our custom to breakfast at an early hour in the morning, as we
+had to be away looking after the cattle, and attending to the other
+duties of the farm.
+
+The lieutenant happened to ask me why we called the location "Roaring
+Water."
+
+"I see only a quiet, decent stream flowing by into the valley below," he
+observed.
+
+"Wait until we have a breeze coming down the canon, and then you will
+understand why we gave the name of `Roaring Water' to this place," I
+answered.  "As I can be spared this morning, and there is not much
+chance of the enemy coming, if you like to accompany me I will take you
+to the cataract which gives its name to this `quiet, decent stream,' as
+you call it; then you will believe that we have not misnamed the
+locality."
+
+We set off together.  The lieutenant looked as if he would have liked to
+ask Clarice to accompany us; but she was busy about her household
+duties, and gave no response to his unspoken invitation.
+
+Boy-like, I took a great fancy to the young officer.  He was quiet and
+gentlemanly, and free from all conceit.
+
+I took him to Cold-Water Spring, at which Clarice had met the Indian;
+and after swallowing a draught from it, we made our way onward over the
+rough rocks and fallen logs until we came in sight of what we called our
+cataract.  It appeared directly before us, rushing, as it were, out of
+the side of the hill (though in reality there was a considerable stream
+above us, which was concealed by the summits of the intervening rocks);
+then downward it came in two leaps, striking a ledge about half-way,
+where masses of spray were sent off; and then taking a second leap, it
+fell into a pool; now rushing forth again foaming and roaring down a
+steep incline, until it reached the more level portion of the canon.
+
+"That is indeed a fine cataract, and you have well named your location
+from it," observed the lieutenant.  "I wish I had had my sketch-book
+with me; I might have made a drawing of it, to carry away in remembrance
+of my visit here."
+
+"I will send you one with great pleasure," I answered.
+
+"Do you draw?" he asked, with a look of surprise, probably thinking that
+such an art was not likely to be possessed by a young backwoodsman.
+
+"I learned when I was a boy, and I have a taste that way, although I
+have but little time to exercise it," I answered.
+
+He replied that he should be very much obliged.  "Does your sister
+draw?--I conclude that young lady is your sister?" he said in a tone of
+inquiry.
+
+"Oh yes!  Clarice draws better than I do," I said.  "But she has even
+less time than I have, for she is busy from morning till night; there is
+no time to spare for amusement of any sort.  Uncle Jeff would not
+approve of our `idling our time,' as he would call it, in that sort of
+way."
+
+The lieutenant seemed inclined to linger at the waterfall, so that I had
+to hurry him away, as I wanted to be back to attend to my duties.  I was
+anxious, also, to hear what account Bartle Won would bring in.
+
+But the day passed away, and Bartle did not appear.  Uncle Jeff's
+confidence that he could have come to no harm was not, however, shaken.
+
+"It may be that he has discovered the enemy, and is watching their
+movements; or perhaps he has been tempted to go on and on until he has
+found out that there is no enemy to be met with, or that they have taken
+the alarm and beat a retreat," he observed.
+
+Still the lieutenant was unwilling to leave us, although Uncle Jeff did
+not press him to stay.
+
+"It will never do for me to hurry off with my men, and leave a party of
+whites in a solitary farm to be slaughtered by those Redskin savages,"
+he said.
+
+At all events, he stayed on until the day was so far spent that it would
+not have been worth while to have started.
+
+Clarice found a little leisure to sit down at the table with her
+needle-work, very much to the satisfaction of the lieutenant, who did
+his best to make himself agreeable.
+
+I was away down the valley driving the cattle into their pen, when I
+caught sight of Bartle coming along at his usual swinging pace towards
+the farm.
+
+"Well, what news?"  I asked, as I came up to him.
+
+"Our friend Winnemak was not romancing," he answered.  "There were fully
+as many warriors on the war-path as he stated; but, for some reason or
+other, they turned about and are going south.  I came upon their trail
+after they had broken up their last camp, and I had no difficulty in
+getting close enough to them to make out their numbers, and the tribes
+they belong to.  The appearance of their camp, however, told me clearly
+that they are a very large body.  We have to thank the chief for his
+warning; at the same time, we need not trouble ourselves any more on the
+subject."
+
+"Have they done any harm on their march?"  I asked.
+
+"As to that, I am afraid that some settlers to the south have suffered;
+for I saw, at night, the glare of several fires, with which the rascals
+must have had something to do.  I only hope that the poor white men had
+time to escape with their lives.  If I had not been in a hurry to get
+back, I would have followed the varmints, and picked off any stragglers
+I might have come across."
+
+"As you, my friends, are safe for the present, I must be off to-morrow
+morning with my men," said the lieutenant when I got back; "but I will
+report the position you are in at Fort Harwood, and should you have
+reason to expect an attack you can dispatch a messenger, and relief
+will, I am sure, be immediately sent you."
+
+I do not know that Uncle Jeff cared much about this promise, so
+confident did he feel in his power to protect his own property,--
+believing that his men, though few, would prove staunch.  But he thanked
+the lieutenant, and hoped he should have the pleasure of seeing him
+again before long.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+During the night the sergeant was taken ill; and as he was no better in
+the morning, Lieutenant Broadstreet, who did not wish to go without him,
+was further delayed.  The lieutenant hoped, however, that by noon the
+poor fellow might have sufficiently recovered to enable them to start.
+
+After breakfast I accompanied him to the hut to visit the other men.
+Although he summoned them by name,--shouting out "Karl Klitz," "Barney
+Gillooly," "Pat Sperry,"--no one answered; so, shoving open the door, we
+entered.  At first the hut appeared to be empty, but as we looked into
+one of the bunks we beheld the last-named individual, so sound asleep
+that, though his officer shouted to him to know what had become of his
+comrades, he only replied by grunts.
+
+"The fellow must be drunk," exclaimed the lieutenant, shaking the man.
+
+This was very evident; and as the lieutenant intended not to set off
+immediately, he resolved to leave him in bed to sleep off his debauch.
+
+But what had become of the German and the fat Irishman? was the
+question.  The men belonging to the hut were all away, so we had to go
+in search of one of them, to learn if he could give any account of the
+truants.  The negro, who went by no other name than Sam or Black Sam,
+was the first we met.  Sam averred, on his honour as a gentleman, that
+when he left the hut in the morning they were all sleeping as quietly as
+lambs; and he concluded that they had gone out to take a bath in the
+stream, or a draught of cool water at the spring.  The latter the
+lieutenant thought most probable, if they had been indulging in
+potations of whisky on the previous evening; as to bathing, none of them
+were likely to go and indulge in such a luxury.
+
+To Cold-Water Spring we went; but they were not to be seen, nor could
+the other men give any account of them.
+
+The lieutenant burst into a fit of laughter, not unmixed with vexation.
+
+"A pretty set of troops I have to command--my sergeant sick, one drunk,
+and two missing."
+
+"Probably Klitz and Gillooly have only taken a ramble, and will soon be
+back," I observed; "and by that time the other fellow will have
+recovered from his tipsy fit; so it is of no use to be vexed.  You
+should be more anxious about Sergeant Custis, for I fear he will not be
+able to accompany you for several days to come."
+
+On going back to the house, we found the sergeant no better.  Rachel,
+indeed, said that he was in a raging fever, and that he must have
+suffered from a sunstroke, or something of that sort.
+
+The lieutenant was now almost in despair; and though the dispatches he
+carried were not of vital importance, yet they ought, he said, to be
+delivered as soon as possible, and he had already delayed two days.  As
+there was no help for it, however, and he could not at all events set
+out until his men came back, I invited him to take a fishing-rod and
+accompany me to a part of the stream where, although he might not catch
+many fish, he would at all events enjoy the scenery.
+
+It was a wild place; the rocks rose to a sheer height of two or three
+hundred feet above our heads, broken into a variety of fantastic forms.
+In one place there was a cleft in the rock, out of which the water
+flowed into the main stream.  The lieutenant, who was fond of fishing,
+was soon absorbed in the sport, and, as I expected, forgot his troubles
+about his men.
+
+He had caught several trout and a couple of catfish, when I saw Rachel
+hurrying towards us.
+
+"Massa Sergeant much worse," she exclaimed; "him fear him die; want bery
+much to see him officer, so I come away while Missie Clarice watch ober
+him.  Him bery quiet now,--no fear ob him crying out for present."
+
+On hearing this, we gathered up our fishing-rods and hastened back to
+the house, considerably outwalking Rachel, who came puffing after us.
+
+We found Clarice standing by the bedside of the sick man, moistening his
+parched lips, and driving away the flies from his face.
+
+"I am afraid I am going, sir," he said as the lieutenant bent over him.
+"Before I die, I wish to tell you that I do not trust those two men of
+ours, Karl Klitz and Gillooly.  I learned from Pat Sperry that they have
+been constantly putting their heads together of late, and he suspects
+that they intend either to desert, or to do some mischief or other."
+
+"Thank you," said the lieutenant; "but do not trouble yourself about
+such matters now.  I will look after the men.  You must try to keep your
+mind quiet.  I hope that you are not going to die, as you suppose.  I
+have seen many men look much worse than you do, and yet recover."
+
+The sergeant, after he had relieved his mind, appeared to be more quiet.
+Rachel insisted on his taking some of her remedies; and as evening drew
+on he was apparently better,--at all events, no worse.  Clarice and the
+negress were unremitting in their attentions, utterly regardless of the
+fever being infectious; I do not think, indeed, that the idea that it
+was so ever entered their heads.
+
+The lieutenant had been so occupied with his poor sergeant, that he
+seemed to have forgotten all about his missing men.  At last, however,
+he recollected them, and I went back with him to the hut.
+
+On the way we looked into the stables, where we found the five horses
+and baggage-mules all right; so that the men, if they had deserted, must
+have done so on foot.
+
+We opened the door of the hut, hoping that possibly by this time the
+missing men might have returned; but neither of them was there.  The
+drunken fellow was, however, still sleeping on, and probably would have
+slept on until his hut companions came back, had we not roused him up.
+
+"You must take care that your people do not give him any more liquor, or
+he will be in the same state to-morrow morning," observed the
+lieutenant.
+
+We had some difficulty in bringing the man to his senses; but the
+lieutenant finding a pitcher of water, poured the contents over him,
+which effectually roused him up.
+
+"Hullo! murther! are we all going to be drowned entirely at the bottom?
+Sure the river's burst over us!" he exclaimed, springing out of his
+bunk.  He looked very much astonished at seeing the lieutenant and me;
+but quickly bringing himself into position, and giving a military
+salute, "All right, your honour," said he.
+
+"Yes, I see that you are so now," said the lieutenant; "but little help
+you could have afforded us, had we been attacked by the enemy.  I must
+call you to account by-and-by.  What has become of your comrades?"
+
+"Sure, your honour, are they not all sleeping sweetly as infants in
+their bunks?"  He peered as he spoke into the bunks which had been
+occupied by the other men.  "The drunken bastes, it was there I left
+them barely two hours ago, while I jist turned in to get a quiet snooze.
+They are not there now, your honour," he observed, with a twinkle in
+his eye; "they must have gone out unbeknown to me.  It is mighty
+surprising!"
+
+"Why, you impudent rascal, you have been asleep for the last twelve
+hours," said the lieutenant, scarcely able to restrain his gravity.
+"Take care that this does not happen again; keep sober while you remain
+here."
+
+"Sure, your honour, I would not touch a dhrop of the cratur, even if
+they were to try and pour it down me throat," he answered.  "But I found
+a countryman of mine living here.  It is a hard matter, when one meets a
+boy from Old Ireland, to refuse jist a sip of the potheen for the sake
+of gintility!"
+
+"Follow me to the house as soon as you have put yourself into decent
+order," said the lieutenant, not wishing to exchange further words with
+the trooper.
+
+Pat touched his hat, to signify that he would obey the order, and the
+lieutenant and I walked on.
+
+"I cannot put that fellow under arrest, seeing that I have no one to
+whom I can give him in charge," said the lieutenant, laughing.  "But
+what can have become of the others?  I do not think, notwithstanding
+what Sergeant Custis said, that they can have deserted.  They would
+scarcely make an attempt to get over this wild country alone, and on
+foot."
+
+As soon as Pat made his appearance, the lieutenant ordered him to stand
+on guard at the door, where he kept him until nightfall.
+
+When our men came in, I inquired whether they knew anything of the
+troopers.  They one and all averred that they had left them sleeping in
+the hut, and that they had no notion where they could have gone.
+
+"Could the fellows, when probably as drunk as Pat, have fallen into the
+torrent and been drowned!" exclaimed the lieutenant anxiously.
+
+"Sure, they were as sober as judges," observed Dan, one of our men.
+Then an idea seemed to strike him.  "To be sure, your honour, they might
+have gone fishing up the stream.  That broth of a boy Barney might jist
+have rolled in, and the long Dutchman have tried to haul him out, and
+both have been carried away together.  Ill luck to Roaring Water, if it
+has swallowed up my countryman Barney."
+
+I suspected, from the way in which Dan spoke, that he had no great
+belief that such a catastrophe had occurred; in fact, knowing the fellow
+pretty well, I thought it very probable that, notwithstanding what he
+said, he was cognisant of the whereabouts of the truants.
+
+Uncle Jeff and the lieutenant examined and cross-examined all the men;
+but no satisfactory information could be got out of them.
+
+"Whether they come back or not, I must be on my way to-morrow morning
+with Sperry; while I leave my sergeant under your care, if you will take
+charge of him," said the lieutenant.
+
+Uncle Jeff willingly undertook to do this.
+
+"As you are unacquainted with the way, and Pat is not likely to be of
+much assistance, if Uncle Jeff will allow me I will act as your guide to
+the mouth of the pass, after which you will have no great difficulty in
+finding your way to Fort Harwood," I said to the lieutenant.
+
+He gladly accepted my offer.
+
+"But what about the possibility of the farm being attacked by the
+Indians?  You would not like in that case to be absent, and I should be
+unwilling to deprive your friends of your aid," he observed.  "If you
+accompany me, I must leave Sperry to attend on Sergeant Custis, and to
+come on with him when he is well enough.  Although I do not compare the
+Irishman to you, yet, should the farm be attacked, I can answer for his
+firing away as long as he has a bullet left in his pouch."
+
+Uncle Jeff, much to my satisfaction, allowed me to accompany the
+lieutenant.  I had a good horse, too, and had no fears about making my
+way back safely, even should the country be swarming with Indians.
+
+When the lieutenant spoke of the possibility of the farm being attacked
+by the Redskins, Uncle Jeff laughed.  "They will not venture thus far,"
+he observed.  "But even if they do come, we will give a good account of
+them.  Not to speak of my rifle, Bartle's and Gideon's are each worth
+fifty muskets in the hands of the Indians; our other four fellows, with
+your trooper, will keep the rest at bay, however many there may be of
+them.  The sergeant, too, will be able to handle a rifle before long, I
+hope; while Clarice and Rachel will load the arms, and look after any of
+us who may be hurt.  But we need not talk about that; the varmints will
+not trouble us, you may depend upon it."
+
+When Bartle Won heard of the disappearance of the troopers, and that we
+had examined our men, but had been unable to elicit any information from
+them as to what had become of the truants, he observed,--"Leave that to
+me.  If they know anything about the matter, I will get it out of them
+before long.  As to the fellows having tumbled into the torrent, I do
+not believe it.  They are not likely to have gone off without our people
+knowing something about it.  They are either in hiding somewhere near
+Roaring Water,--and if so, I shall soon ferret them out,--or else they
+have gone away to take squaws from among the Indians, and set up for
+themselves."
+
+The lieutenant did not think that the latter proceeding was very
+probable; but their absence was mysterious, and we had to confess that
+we were no wiser as to their whereabouts than we were at first.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE.
+
+MY FAMILY HISTORY--MY FATHER, ONCE A CAPTAIN IN THE BRITISH ARMY, COMES
+TO AMERICA AND MARRIES UNCLE JEFF'S SISTER--HE SETTLES ON A FARM IN
+OHIO--CLARICE AND I ARE BORN--MY GRANDFATHER'S FARM DESTROYED BY A
+FLOOD--THE NEXT YEAR OUR FARM IS BURNT--MY FATHER RESOLVES TO MIGRATE TO
+THE WEST--WE SET OFF IN WAGGONS WITH AN EMIGRANT TRAIN--PROSPEROUS
+COMMENCEMENT OF JOURNEY--PROVISIONS RUN SHORT--I WITNESS A BUFFALO
+HUNT--THE EMIGRANTS SUFFER FROM CHOLERA--MY MOTHER DIES--MANY OF THE
+EMIGRANTS TURN BACK--MY FATHER PERSEVERES--FIERCELY ATTACKED BY
+INDIANS--WE KEEP THEM AT BAY--AGAIN ATTACKED, WHEN A STRANGER COMES TO
+OUR ASSISTANCE--CLARICE GIVES HIM A BOOK--HE PROMISES TO READ IT--WE
+CONTINUE OUR JOURNEY, AND REACH FORT KEARNEY--REMAIN THERE FOR SOME
+MONTHS--MY FATHER, THOUGH STILL SUFFERING, INSISTS ON SETTING OUT
+AGAIN--HE SOON BECOMES WORSE, AND DIES--I AM DIGGING HIS GRAVE, WHEN AN
+EMIGRANT TRAIN COMES BY--UNCLE JEFF IS THE LEADER, AND WE ACCOMPANY HIM
+TO ROARING WATER.
+
+But the readers of my Journal, if so I may venture to call it, would
+like to know how Clarice and I came to be at Uncle Jeff's farm.  To do
+so, I must give a little bit of my family history, which probably would
+not otherwise interest them.
+
+My father, Captain Middlemore, had been an officer in the English army,
+but sold out and came to America.  Being, I suspect, of a roving
+disposition, he had travelled through most of the Eastern States without
+finding any spot where he could make up his mind to settle.  At length
+he bent his steps to Ohio; in the western part of which he had one night
+to seek shelter from a storm at the farm of a substantial settler, a Mr
+Ralph Crockett (the father of Uncle Jeff).  Mr Crockett treated the
+English stranger with a hospitality which the farmers of Ohio never
+failed to show to their guests.  He had several sons, but he spoke of
+one who seemed to have a warm place in his heart, and who had gone away
+some years before, and was leading a wild hunter's life on the prairies.
+
+"I should like to fall in with him," said my father.  "It is the sort of
+life I have a fancy for leading,--hunting the buffalo and fighting the
+Red Indian."
+
+"Better stay and settle down among us, stranger," said Mr Crockett.
+"In a few years, if you turn to with a will, and have some little money
+to begin with, you will be a wealthy man, with broad acres of your own,
+and able to supply the Eastern States with thousands of bushels of
+wheat.  It is a proud thing to feel that we feed, not only the people of
+our own land, but many who would be starving, if it were not for us, in
+that tax-burdened country of yours."
+
+My father laughed at the way in which the Ohio farmer spoke of Old
+England; but notwithstanding that, he thought the matter over seriously.
+He was influenced not a little, too, I have an idea, by the admiration
+he felt for the farmer's only daughter, Mary Crockett.
+
+My father had the price of his commission still almost intact; and it
+was looked upon as almost a princely fortune to begin with in that part
+of the world.  So, as he received no hint to go,--indeed, he was warmly
+pressed to stay whenever he spoke of moving,--he stayed, and stayed on.
+At last he asked Mary Crockett to become his wife, and promised to
+settle down on the nearest farm her father could obtain for him.
+
+Mr Crockett applauded his resolution; and he purchased a farm which
+happened to be for sale only a few miles off, and gave him his daughter
+for a wife.  She had gone to school in Philadelphia, where she had
+gained sufficient accomplishments to satisfy my father's fastidious
+taste; and she was, besides being very pretty, a Christian young woman.
+
+She often spoke of her brother Jeff with warm affection, for he, when at
+home, had ever showed himself to be a loving, kind brother; indeed, Mary
+was his pet, and if anybody could have induced him to lead a settled
+life, she might have done it.  He had had, somehow or other, a quarrel
+with her one day,--little more than a tiff,--so off he went into the
+woods and across the prairies; and, as it turned out, he never came
+back.  She was not the cause of his going, for he had been thinking
+about it for a long time before, but this tiff just set the ball
+rolling.
+
+My parents were perfectly happy in their married life, and might have
+remained so had it not been for my poor father's unsettled disposition.
+I was born, then Clarice; and both my father and mother devoted all the
+time they could spare from the duties of the farm to our education.
+Clarice was always a bright, intelligent little creature, and rapidly
+took in all the instruction she received.  My mother's only unhappiness
+arose from the thought of sending her to Philadelphia,--where she might
+have to complete her education, as she wished her to become as perfect a
+lady as our father was a thorough gentleman.  He, being well informed,
+was able to instruct me, and I made as much progress as my sister.
+Rough in some respects as were our lives, we found the advantage of
+this, as we could enjoy many amusements from which we should otherwise
+have been debarred.  Clarice learned to play and sing from our mother;
+and I was especially fond of drawing, an art in which my father was well
+able to instruct me.
+
+But our family, hitherto prosperous, were now to suffer severe reverses.
+My grandfather's property lay in a rich bottom, and one early spring
+the floods came and swept away his corn-fields, destroyed his meadows,
+and carried off his cattle.  One of my uncles was drowned at that time,
+another died of fever caught from exposure, and a third was killed by
+the fall of a tree.  The old man did not complain at God's dealing with
+him, for he was a true Christian, but he bowed his head; and he died
+shortly afterwards, at our house.  My father's property had escaped the
+floods, but the following summer, which was an unusually dry one, a fire
+swept over the country.  It reached our farm, and although my father had
+timely notice, so that he was able to put my mother and us into one of
+the waggons, with the most valuable part of his household property, the
+rest was enveloped in flames shortly after we had left the house.  The
+next day not a building, not a fence, remained standing.  The whole farm
+was a scene of black desolation.
+
+"We have had a pretty strong hint to move westward, which I have long
+been thinking of doing," said my father.  "Many who have gone to the
+Pacific coast have become possessed of wealth in half the time we have
+taken to get this farm in order.  What do you say, Mary?"
+
+Our mother was always ready to do whatever he wished, although she would
+rather have remained in the part of the country where she was born and
+still had many friends.
+
+"I should say, let us go eastward, and purchase a small farm in some
+more civilised district; we can then send our children to school, and be
+able to see them during the holidays," she observed.
+
+"We ourselves can give them such schooling as they require," replied my
+father.  "You will make Clarice as accomplished as yourself, and I will
+take good care of Ralph.  It is not book learning a lad requires to get
+on in this country.  He is a good hand at shooting and fishing,
+understands all sorts of farm work, and is as good a rider as any boy of
+his age.  He will forget all these accomplishments if we go eastward;
+whereas if we move westward, he will improve still more.  And as he is
+as sharp as a Yankee, he will do well enough in whatever line he
+follows."
+
+The truth was, my father had made up his mind to go in the direction he
+proposed, and was not to be turned aside by any arguments, however
+sensible, which my mother might offer.  So it was settled that we should
+make a long journey across the prairie.  As for the difficulties and
+dangers to be encountered, or the hardships to which my mother and
+Clarice would be exposed, he did not take these into consideration.
+There are people with minds so constituted that they only see one side
+of a question; and my father was unhappily one of these.
+
+He proposed to unite himself with some respectable party of emigrants,
+who would travel together for mutual protection.  He considered that
+they might thus set at defiance any band of Indians, however numerous,
+which they might encounter.
+
+The two farms were no doubt much inferior in value to what they would
+have been with buildings, outhouses and fencings, standing crops and
+stock; yet, even as they stood, they were worth a good sum, for they
+were already cleared--the chief work of the settler being thus done.
+However, they realised as much as my father expected, and with a
+well-equipped train and several hired attendants we set out.
+
+The first part of our journey was tolerably easy; the emigrants were
+good-humoured, we had abundance of provisions, the country was well
+watered, and the cattle could obtain plenty of rich grass to keep up
+their strength.  But as soon as we got out of the more civilised
+districts our difficulties began.  Some of the rivers were very
+difficult to cross, and often there was no small danger of the waggons
+sticking fast in some spots, or being carried down by the current in
+others; then we had hills to surmount and rocky ground to pass over,
+where there was no herbage or water for our beasts.
+
+My father kept aloof as much as possible from the other emigrants, so
+that we did not hear of the complaints they were making.  At last a
+rumour reached us that the owners of several of the waggons were talking
+of turning back.  We had met at different times two or three trains of
+people who had given up the journey, and these had declared that the
+hardships were greater than any human beings could bear; but my father
+had made up his mind, and go on he would, even if he carried his own
+waggons alone over the prairie.  A few Indians hovered round us at
+times, but our rifle-shots warned them to keep off; and at night we
+encamped, under my father's direction, in military fashion, with the
+waggons placed so as to form a fortification round the camp.
+
+Our fresh provisions had come to an end, too, and it now became very
+important that we should procure game.
+
+We had encamped one evening, when several Indians approached, making
+signs that they were friends.  They proved to belong to a tribe which
+had been at peace with the white people.  Our guide knew one of them,
+and we had no doubt that they could be trusted.  They have long since
+been driven from their old hunting-grounds, and I forget even the name
+of the tribe.  When they heard that we were in want of fresh food, they
+said that if any of our hunters would accompany them they would show us
+where buffalo could be found; and that we might either shoot them
+ourselves, or that they would try to kill some for us.
+
+Few of our people, although hardy backwoodsmen, were accustomed to
+hunting; and few, indeed, had ever seen any buffalo.  But my father,
+feeling the importance of obtaining some fresh meat, volunteered to
+go,--directing a light cart to follow, in order to bring back our
+game,--and I obtained leave to accompany him.
+
+One of the Indians could speak English sufficiently well to make himself
+understood by us.  Talking to my father, and finding that even he had
+never shot any buffalo, the Indian advised that we should allow him and
+his people to attack the herd in their own manner, as the animals might
+take alarm before we could get up to them, and escape us altogether.  My
+father agreed to this, saying that, should they fail, he would be ready
+with his rifle to ride after the herd and try to bring down one or more
+of them.  This plan was agreed to, and we rode forward.
+
+I observed our Indian friend dismount and put his ear to the ground
+several times as we rode forward.  My father asked him why he did this.
+He replied that it was to ascertain how far off the buffalo were: he
+could judge of the distance by the sound of their feet, and their
+occasional roars as the bulls engaged in combat.  Not an animal,
+however, was yet visible.
+
+At last we caught sight of a number of dark objects moving on the
+prairie in the far distance.
+
+"There is the herd!" exclaimed the Indian; "we must now be wary how we
+approach."
+
+Still we went on, the animals being too busily engaged in grazing, or in
+attacking each other, to observe us.  At last the Indian advised that we
+should halt behind a knoll which rose out of the plain, with a few
+bushes on the summit.  Here we could remain concealed from the herd.
+So, having gained the foot of the knoll, we dismounted; and leaving our
+horses in charge of the men with the cart, my father and I climbed up to
+the top, where by crouching down we were unseen by the herd, although we
+could observe all that was going forward.
+
+The Indian hunters now took some wolf-skins which had been hanging to
+their saddles, and completely covering themselves up, so as to represent
+wolves, they began to creep towards the herd, trailing their rifles at
+their sides; thus they got nearer and nearer the herd.  Whenever any of
+the animals stopped to look at them, they stopped also; when the buffalo
+went on feeding, they advanced.  At length each hunter, having selected
+a cow, suddenly sprang to his knees and fired, and three fine animals
+rolled over; though, had the buffalo bulls known their power, they
+might, with the greatest ease, have crushed their human foes.  On
+hearing the shots, the whole herd took to flight.
+
+"Well done!" cried my father.  "I should like to have another, though;"
+and hurrying down the hill, he mounted his horse and galloped off in
+chase of the retreating herd.
+
+Heavy and clumsy as the animals looked, so rapidly did they rush over
+the ground that he could only got within range of two or three of the
+rearmost.  Pulling up, he fired; but the buffalo dashed on; and,
+unwilling to fatigue his horse, my father came back, somewhat annoyed at
+his failure.
+
+The three animals which had been killed were quickly cut up, and we
+loaded our cart with the meat; after which the Indians accompanied us
+back to the camp to receive the reward we had promised.  The supply of
+fresh meat was very welcome, and helped to keep sickness at a distance
+for some time longer.
+
+After this we made several days' journey, the supply of fresh provisions
+putting all hands into better spirits than they had shown for some time.
+There was but little chance, however, of our replenishing our stock
+when that was exhausted, for we saw Indians frequently hovering round
+our camp who were not likely to prove as friendly as those we had before
+met with, and it would be dangerous to go to any distance in search of
+game, as there was a probability of our being cut off by them.
+
+We had soon another enemy to contend with, more subtile than even the
+Redskins.  Cholera broke out among the emigrants, and one after another
+succumbed.  This determined those who had before talked of going back to
+carry out their intentions; and notwithstanding the expostulations of my
+father and others, they turned round the heads of their cattle, and back
+they went over the road we had come.
+
+I had by this time observed that my mother was not looking so well as
+usual.  One night she became very ill, and in spite of all my father and
+two kind women of our party could do for her, before morning she was
+dead.  My father appeared inconsolable; and, naturally, Clarice and I
+were very unhappy.  We would willingly have died with her.
+
+"But we must not complain at what God ordains," said Clarice; "we must
+wish to live, to be of use to poor papa.  She is happy, we know; she
+trusted in Christ, and has gone to dwell with him."
+
+Clarice succeeded better than I did in soothing our poor father's grief.
+I thought that he himself would now wish to go back, but he was too
+proud to think of doing that.  He had become the acknowledged leader of
+the party, and the sturdy men who remained with us were now all for
+going forward; so, after we had buried our dear mother in a grove of
+trees which grew near the camp, and had built a monument of rough stones
+over her grave, to mark the spot, we once more moved forward.
+
+We had just formed our camp the next day, in a more exposed situation
+than usual, when we saw a party of mounted Indians hovering in the
+distance.  My father, who had not lifted his head until now, gave orders
+for the disposal of the waggons as could best be done.  There were not
+sufficient to form a large circle, however, so that our fortifications
+were less strong than they had before been.  We made the cattle graze as
+close to the camp as possible, so that they might be driven inside at a
+moment's notice; and of course we kept strict watch, one half of the men
+only lying down at a time.
+
+The night had almost passed away without our being assailed, when just
+before dawn those on watch shouted out--
+
+"Here they are!  Up, up, boys! got in the cattle--quick!"
+
+Just as the last animal was driven inside our fortifications the enemy
+were upon us.  We received them with a hot fire, which emptied three
+saddles; when, according to their fashion, they lifted up their dead or
+wounded companions and carried them off out of the range of our rifles.
+
+Our men shouted, thinking that they had gained the victory; but the
+Indians were only preparing for another assault.  Seeing the smallness
+of our numbers, they were persuaded that they could overwhelm us; and
+soon we caught sight of them moving round so as to encircle our camp,
+and thus attack us on all sides at once.
+
+"Remember the women and children," cried my father, whose spirit was now
+aroused.  "If we give in, we and they will be massacred; so we can do
+nothing but fight to the last."
+
+The men shouted, and vowed to stand by each other.
+
+Before the Indians, however, got within range of our rifles, they
+wheeled round and galloped off again, but we could still see them
+hovering round us.  It was pretty evident that they had not given up the
+intention of attacking us; their object being to weary us out, and make
+our hearts, as they would call it, turn pale.
+
+Just before the sun rose above the horizon they once more came on,
+decreasing the circumference of the circle, and gradually closing in
+upon us; not at a rapid rate, however, but slowly--sometimes so slowly
+that they scarcely appeared to move.
+
+"Do not fire, friends, until you can take good aim," cried my father, as
+the enemy got within distant rifle range.  "It is just what they wish us
+to do; then they will come charging down upon us, in the hope of finding
+our rifles unloaded.  Better let them come sufficiently near to see
+their eyes; alternate men of you only fire."
+
+The savages were armed only with bows and spears; still they could shoot
+their arrows, we knew, when galloping at full speed.
+
+At a sign from one of their leaders they suddenly put their horses to
+full speed, at the same time giving vent to what I can only describe as
+a mingling of shrieks and shouts and howls, forming the terrific Indian
+war-whoop.  They were mistaken, however, if they expected to frighten
+our sturdy backwoodsmen.  The first of our men fired when they were
+about twenty yards off.  Several of the red warriors were knocked over,
+but the rest came on, shooting their arrows, and fancying that they had
+to attack men with empty firearms.  The second shots were full in their
+faces, telling therefore with great effect; while our people raised a
+shout, which, if not as shrill, was almost as telling as that of the
+Indian war-whoop.  The first men who had fired were ramming away with
+all their might to reload, and were able to deliver a second fire; while
+those who had pistols discharged them directly afterwards.
+
+The Indians, supposing that our party, although we had but few waggons,
+must be far more numerous than they had expected, wheeled round without
+attempting to break through the barricade, and galloped off at full
+speed,--not even attempting to pick up those who had fallen.
+
+The women and children, with Clarice, I should have said, had been
+protected by a barricade of bales and chests; so that, although a number
+of arrows had flown into our enclosure, not one of them was hurt.
+
+On looking at my father, I saw that he was paler than usual; and what
+was my dismay to find that an arrow had entered his side!  It was
+quickly cut out, although the operation caused him much suffering.  He
+declared, however, that it was only a flesh wound, and not worth taking
+into consideration.
+
+The Indians being still near us, we thought it only too probable that we
+should again be attacked.  And, indeed, our anticipations were soon
+fully realised.  In less than half an hour, after having apparently been
+reinforced, they once more came on, but this time with; the intention of
+attacking only one side.
+
+We were looking about us, however, in every direction, to ascertain what
+manoeuvres they might adopt, when we saw to the westward another body of
+horsemen coming across the prairie.
+
+"We are to have a fresh band of them upon us," cried some of our party.
+
+"No, no," I shouted out; "they are white men!  I see their rifle-barrels
+glancing in the sun; and there are no plumes above their heads!"
+
+I was right; and before many minutes were over the Indians had seen them
+too, and, not liking their looks, had galloped off to the southward.
+
+We received the strangers with cheers as they drew near; and they proved
+to be a large body of traders.
+
+"We heard your shots, and guessed that those Pawnee rascals were upon
+you," said their leader, as he dismounted.
+
+He came up to where my father was lying by the side of the waggon.
+
+"I am sorry to see that you are hurt, friend," he said.  "Any of the
+rest of your people wounded?  If there are, and your party will come on
+to our camp, we will render you all the assistance in our power."
+
+"Only two of our men have been hit, and that but slightly; and my wound
+is nothing," answered my father.  "We are much obliged to you, however."
+
+"Well, at all events I would advise you to harness your beasts and move
+on, or these fellows will be coming back again," said the stranger.  "We
+too must not stay here long, for if they think that our camp is left
+unguarded they may pay it a visit."  His eye, as he was speaking, fell
+on Clarice.  "Why! my little maiden, were you not frightened at seeing
+those fierce horsemen galloping up to your camp?" he asked.
+
+"No," she answered simply; "I trusted in God, for I knew that he would
+take care of us."
+
+The stranger gazed at her with surprise, and said something which made
+her look up.
+
+"Why! don't you always trust in God?" she asked.
+
+"I don't think much about him; and I don't suppose he thinks much about
+such a wild fellow as I am," he said in a careless tone.
+
+"I wish you would, then," she said; "nobody can be happy if they do not
+trust in God and accept his offer of salvation, because they cannot feel
+secure for a moment without his love and protection; and they will not
+know where they are to go to when they die."
+
+"I have not thought about that," said the stranger, in the same tone as
+before; "and I do not suppose I am likely to find it out."
+
+"Then let me give you a book," said Clarice, "which will tell you all
+about it."
+
+She went to the waggon, and brought out a small Bible.
+
+"There!  If you will read that, and do what it tells, you will become
+wise and happy."
+
+"Well, my dear, I will accept your book, and do as you advise me.  I
+once knew something about the Bible, before I left home, years and years
+ago; but I have not looked into one since."
+
+Without opening the book, the stranger placed it in his breast-pocket;
+then, after exchanging a few words with my father, who promised to
+follow his advice, he left the camp and rejoined his companions.
+
+My father, being unable to ride without difficulty, had himself placed
+in the waggon by the side of Clarice; and the animals being put to, we
+once more moved on to the westward, while we saw our late visitors take
+an easterly course.
+
+My father, however, made but slow progress towards recovery; his wound
+was more serious than he had supposed, and it was too clear that he was
+in a very unfit state to undergo the fatigue of a journey.
+
+We at length reached Fort Kearney, on the Platte River, where we met
+with a kind reception from the officers of the garrison, while my father
+received that attention from the surgeon he so much required.  The rest
+of our party were unwilling to delay longer than was necessary; but the
+surgeon assured my father that he would risk his life should he
+continue, in the state in which he then was, to prosecute his journey.
+Very unwillingly, therefore, he consented to remain,--for our sakes more
+than his own,--while our late companions proceeded towards their
+destination.  We here remained several months, of course at great
+expense, as both our men and animals had to be fed, although we
+ourselves were entertained without cost by our hospitable hosts.
+
+At last another emigrant train halted at the post, and my father,
+unwilling longer to trespass on the kindness of his entertainers,
+insisted on continuing his journey with them.  The surgeon warned him
+that he would do so at great risk; observing that should the wound,
+which was scarcely healed, break out again, it would prove a serious
+matter.  Still, his desire to be actively engaged in forming the new
+settlement prevailed over all other considerations, and on a fatal day
+he started, in company with about a dozen other waggons.  The owners,
+who were rough farmers, took very little interest either in my poor
+father or in us.
+
+We had been travelling for about ten days or a fortnight when my father
+again fell ill.  He tried to proceed in the waggon, but was unable to
+bear the jolting; and we were at length obliged to remain in camp by
+ourselves, while the rest of the train continued on the road.  Our camp
+was pitched in an angle formed by a broad stream on the side of a wood,
+so that we were pretty well protected should enemies on horseback attack
+us.  My father proposed to remain here to await another emigrant train,
+hoping in a short time to be sufficiently recovered to move on.  But, to
+our great grief, Clarice and I saw that he was rapidly sinking.  He
+himself did not appear to be aware of his condition; and fearing that it
+would aggravate his sufferings were he to think he was about to leave
+us, young as we were, in the midst of the wild prairie among strangers,
+we were unwilling to tell him what we thought.
+
+The men with us began to grumble at the long delay, and declared their
+intention of moving forward with the next emigrant train which should
+come by.  But what was our dismay, one morning, to find that both the
+villains had gone, carrying off the cart, and a considerable amount of
+our property!  We were not aware at this time, however, that they had
+managed to get hold of the chest which contained our money.  Our father
+was so ill, too, that we did not tell him what had occurred; and that
+very evening, as Clarice and I were sitting by his side holding his
+hands, he ceased to breathe.
+
+At first we could not persuade ourselves that he was dead.  That was
+indeed a terrible night.  I felt, however, that something must be done,
+and that the first thing was to bury our poor father.  We had spades and
+pick-axes in the waggon, so, taking one of each, I commenced my
+melancholy task near the banks of a stream.
+
+I was thus engaged when I heard Clarice cry out; and on looking up I saw
+a small emigrant train passing, which must have been encamped at no
+great distance from us down the river.  Fearing that they might pass
+without observing us, I ran forward shouting out, entreating the leader
+to stop.  The train immediately came to a standstill, and a man advanced
+towards me, in whom I soon recognised the person to whom Clarice had
+given the book many months before.
+
+"Why, my man," he said, "I thought I knew you!  How are your sister and
+your father?  He had got an ugly hurt, I recollect, when I saw him."
+
+"He is just dead," I answered.
+
+"Dead!" he exclaimed; "and are you two young ones left on the prairie
+alone?"
+
+"Yes," I replied; "our men have made off, and I was going to beg you to
+take us along with you."
+
+"That I will do right gladly," said the stranger.
+
+When I told him how I was engaged, he immediately sent some of his men,
+and they at once set to work and dug a deep grave.  Our poor father
+having then been placed in it, they raised over it a pile of heavy logs.
+
+"I wish we could have done better for him," said the stranger; "but many
+a fine fellow sleeps under such a monument as that."
+
+I need not dwell upon our grief as we watched these proceedings.  I was
+sure that the sooner Clarice was away from the spot the better it would
+be for her; so, as the leader of the emigrant train did not wish to
+delay longer than was necessary, I assisted in harnessing the animals to
+our waggon, and we at once moved on.
+
+I was walking beside our new friend, when he asked me my name.
+
+"Ralph Middlemore," I replied; "and my sister is called Clarice."
+
+"Ralph!" repeated the stranger; "that was my father's name."
+
+"I was called after my grandfather," I observed,--"Ralph Crockett."
+
+I do not know how I came to say that.  My companion started, and gazing
+at me attentively, asked,--"What was your mother's name?"
+
+"Mary."
+
+"Where is she now?" he inquired eagerly.
+
+"She died after we began this sad journey," I said.
+
+The stranger was silent, stifling some deep emotion.
+
+"Your sister is like her,--very like what she was at the same age.  You
+have heard of Jeff Crockett, boy?  I am your Uncle Jeff; and though I
+have much to mourn for, I thank Heaven I was sent to rescue Mary's
+children in their distress.  And Clarice! she has been to me as an angel
+of light.  You remember that she gave me a book.  I took it to please
+her, not intending to read it; but I did read it, and it showed me what
+I was--a wretched, lost sinner.  I learned that I was like the prodigal
+son; and as I heard that my earthly father was no more, I determined to
+go to my Heavenly Father, knowing that he would receive me.  He has done
+so, and I can now say honestly that I am a Christian, and fit to take
+charge of Mary's children."
+
+I need say very little more than that from this time Uncle Jeff
+constituted himself our guardian, and that we thankfully accompanied him
+to the new location he was forming at Roaring Water.
+
+And now I shall resume my narrative at the point at which I interrupted
+it to give the reader a bit of my family history.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR.
+
+AS THE LIEUTENANT AND I ARE STARTING, WE HEAR THAT KLITZ AND BARNEY HAVE
+GONE OFF WITH A WHEEL-BARROW FOR CALIFORNIA--A PLEASANT BIVOUAC--AT LAST
+WE CATCH SIGHT OF THE DESERTERS--THE LIEUTENANT IS ABOUT TO RIDE AFTER
+THEM, WHEN A PARTY OF INDIANS APPEAR--THE INDIANS TAKE TO FLIGHT, AND WE
+LOSE SIGHT OF THE RUNAWAYS--FORM OUR CAMP--DISCOVER THAT WE ARE
+WATCHED--FOLLOW THE SPY, WHO PROVES TO BE MAYSOTTA--FIND THE DESERTERS
+TAKING THEIR EASE--WE CAPTURE THEM, AND, GUIDED BY MAYSOTTA, TAKE THEM
+TO THE INDIAN CAMP--RESOLVE TO RETURN TO THE FARM.
+
+The lieutenant and I had arranged to start at daybreak, on horseback,
+with a couple of baggage-mules carrying provisions and camp utensils.
+Clarice was up to give us our breakfast, and I heard the lieutenant tell
+her how much he hoped to meet her again.
+
+"Not very likely, in this wild region," she answered with perfect
+composure, although a slight blush came to her cheek as she spoke.
+
+The lieutenant having given directions to Pat to remain and do his
+duty,--charging him not to get drunk again, and to come on with the
+sergeant as soon as he was able to travel,--we were on the point of
+mounting our horses, when Bartle came up.
+
+"I thought that I should get something out of our fellows," he said.
+"Of all the strange things I have ever heard of people doing, the
+strangest is what your two troopers are attempting.  It seems that the
+Dutchman and the Irish chap have taken possession of one of our
+wheelbarrows and a couple of pick-axes and spades, with such other
+things as they had a fancy for, and have gone off, expecting to make
+their way to California, where, it is said, gold can be had to any
+amount by digging for it."
+
+"The rascals!" exclaimed the lieutenant; "they will not get there in a
+hurry, and we shall probably come up with them before long."
+
+"They have had a good many days' start of you," observed Bartle, "and if
+they have kept on going, they must be some distance on their road by
+this time."
+
+"Then we must push on all the faster," said the lieutenant.  "I should
+like to catch the fellows before the Indians take their scalps;
+although, when we have got them, it will be difficult to know what to do
+with them, as they will delay me while they move slowly along on foot."
+
+"Send them back to us; we will soon show them how to use their picks and
+spades," said Bartle.
+
+After the usual hand-shaking at parting, and the lieutenant had once
+more lifted his cap to Clarice, who stood at the door watching us, we
+set off down the hill, each of us leading a baggage-mule by the bridle.
+
+Every inch of the way, for some miles, was known to me, so that we could
+move on without troubling ourselves about the road.  We had occasionally
+hills to go over, spurs of the big mountains on our left; but we kept as
+much we could on the level ground,--sometimes having to make a detour
+for the sake of avoiding the rocky heights, which were inaccessible to
+our animals.
+
+As the day advanced we began to look out for the runaways, although the
+lieutenant was of opinion that they must be still some way ahead of us.
+We also kept our eyes open on the chance of any Indians coming down upon
+us,--although I did not think that there was much risk of that; for
+every one at the farm had been convinced that the Arrapahas had long
+since gone away to the southward, and that we should hear no more of
+them.
+
+That night we encamped at a snug spot near a stream, with a wood to the
+southward almost surrounding us, so that the light of our fire could not
+be seen by any one on that side.  There was rich grass for our animals,
+and they were therefore not likely to stray.  We were both young, in
+good health and spirits, and with no cares to oppress us, so we greatly
+enjoyed our bivouac.  We sat by the fire chatting away for some time;
+then we lay down, wrapped in our buffalo robes, to sleep, resolving to
+awake at intervals, in order to put on fresh fuel, as it was important
+not to let our fire get low.  Fortunately, we awoke as often as was
+needful, and by maintaining a good blaze we kept at a distance any bears
+or wolves which might have been prowling about.  The next morning, at
+daybreak, we once more moved on.  As yet, we had discovered no signs of
+the runaways; indeed, when we came to think over the matter, we
+considered that they would probably have kept out of the beaten track,
+in order to avoid discovery should they be pursued.  From the nature of
+the ground, they would not have gone to the left; and I therefore
+suggested that we should keep to the right, where, if they really were
+making for the pass, we should be pretty certain of coming upon them.
+We accordingly struck off at an angle in the direction I proposed, and
+then once more continued our former course northward, keeping a bright
+look-out ahead and on either side.
+
+"If the fellows are still before us, they deserve credit for the speed
+at which they must have been travelling," observed the lieutenant.
+
+"But, notwithstanding, we shall be up with them before dark," I
+exclaimed.  "See there!" and I pointed to a mark on the grass, which my
+quick eye had detected as that made by a single wheel.
+
+The lieutenant, however, could not see it, and thought that my fancy was
+deceiving me.
+
+Had we not been detained by the baggage-mules, we should, I was sure,
+have quickly overtaken the runaways.  I must own, however, that I felt
+very little interest in their capture, for I considered them not worth
+their salt as soldiers,--a couple of "Uncle Sam's" hard bargains,--but
+the lieutenant had no wish to be blamed for losing his men, should he
+arrive at the fort without his escort.
+
+We had to call a halt twice in the day, to allow our animals to feed and
+drink, and to take some refreshment ourselves.  Two or three times, as I
+looked round, I fancied that I saw some objects in the distance; it
+might have been Indians or deer, or perhaps even buffalo, although the
+latter seldom came so close to the mountains.
+
+We, of course, kept our arms ready for any emergency; and as but few of
+the natives in those regions had at that time firearms, I knew that
+Indians would be very wary how they approached within range of our
+rifles.
+
+The day was drawing to a close, and I was looking out for a convenient
+spot for camping, when I saw in the far distance ahead of us, and just
+on the summit of some rising ground, a couple of figures.
+
+"Who can these be?" exclaimed the lieutenant, who saw them at the same
+time.
+
+"Unless I am greatly mistaken, they are your two deserters, Klitz and
+Gillooly."
+
+We dragged on the unwilling mules, in the endeavour to overtake them;
+but I think the fellows must have seen us, for they moved forward at a
+rapid rate.  The fat little Irishman was ahead trundling the
+wheel-barrow, while the tall German followed close at his heels carrying
+a couple of muskets, one over each shoulder.
+
+"Stay by the mules, Ralph; pray do!" exclaimed the lieutenant.  "I will
+gallop after the rascals, and bring them to a halt."
+
+"There is a deep stream between us and them," I observed, "and you may
+have some difficulty in crossing it alone; we will follow at our
+leisure, for we are sure to catch them up before dark."
+
+Just as I spoke, the ominous cry of an Indian war-whoop came from behind
+us; and looking round, we saw nearly a dozen mounted warriors coming on
+at full gallop.  To throw ourselves from our horses, and to get our
+rifles ready for firing, was the work of a moment.
+
+The Indians had expected to see us take to flight, so on observing our
+determined attitude they pulled rein.  They stopped and watched us for
+some time; and then, apparently considering that the risk they would run
+of certainly losing two of their number, if not more, was not worth the
+object to be attained, they wheeled round and galloped off in the
+direction from whence they had come.
+
+We continued watching them until they had disappeared in the distance;
+and when we turned about and again looked for the runaways, they were
+nowhere to be seen.
+
+"Never fear," I observed; "we shall soon catch them up.  But I would
+rather that those Redskin fellows, if they are enemies, had not been in
+the neighbourhood; for they may take it into their heads to pay us a
+visit while we are encamped at night.  Knowing, however, that we are
+well armed, and likely to be prepared for them, they will not attack us
+openly; yet they will, if they can, steal up to our camp, and try to
+take us by surprise."
+
+Our great object now was to find a secure camping-ground; so we pushed
+on, and I led my companion across the stream by a ford somewhat further
+up.  But still we saw nothing of Klitz or Gillooly, while the waning
+light prevented me from discovering their trail, had they crossed where
+we did.  Some way ahead was a large wood, which extended to the very
+foot of the mountains, and within its recesses we should be able to
+shelter ourselves from any onset of horsemen, although the trees would
+favour the approach of enemies who might attempt to take us by surprise.
+
+We rode on, skirting the forest as long as we had sufficient light to
+distinguish objects at any distance, still with the hope that we might
+find the runaways encamped, in case they should not have seen us.  That
+they had not perceived us, near as we were to them, was quite possible,
+as their backs had been turned towards us the whole time they were in
+sight; and their moving on so quickly might be accounted for by their
+wish to reach a good spot for camping on before dark.
+
+We ourselves, after searching about for some time, and being unable to
+find any traces of them, resolved to encamp in a small recess in the
+wood which presented itself.  There was water near, from a rivulet which
+came winding through the forest, and plenty of grass.  We accordingly
+hobbled and staked our horses close at hand; and we then collected wood
+for our fire, and made down our beds with our saddles and horse-cloths.
+
+While we were seated at supper, I proposed to my companion to go a short
+distance from the wood, that we might command a more extensive range of
+view than we could where we were seated; so that should the runaways be
+anywhere in the neighbourhood, we might find them out by the light of
+their fire.  No glare appeared, however, along the whole length of the
+forest; but still that was no proof that they were not somewhere in one
+of its recesses, as, even should they have kindled a fire, the trees
+might conceal its light from us.
+
+Neither of us feeling inclined for sleep, we sat up talking.
+
+"I much regret being obliged to leave the farm, for I confess that I am
+not quite satisfied about the movements of the Indians who have been
+seen by the chief Winnemak," observed Lieutenant Broadstreet.  "Should
+they return to the farm, your friends will be exposed to great danger.
+I purpose, on reaching Fort Harwood, to lay the state of the case before
+the commandant, and to try and induce him to send me back with a body of
+men, either to relieve the garrison of the farm should it be attacked,
+or to go in search of the marauders."
+
+I thanked the lieutenant kindly for this offer, although I did not
+suppose that Uncle Jeff and his companions would have any difficulty in
+beating off their assailants.
+
+"As we must be off by daylight, it is now time to turn in," said the
+lieutenant.  "Suppose you keep one eye open, and I another!  We must
+not, if we can help it, be surprised by wolves or bears--nor Indians
+either.  It is just possible that the fellows whom we saw in the
+afternoon may follow us."
+
+"Then I will sit up and keep watch while you sleep," I said.  "If they
+come at all, they will try and steal upon us when they think that we may
+be asleep."
+
+"I agree to your proposal," answered my companion.  "If you will call me
+in a couple of hours, I will then take my turn, and thus let you have
+the morning watch.  I am accustomed to have my sleep broken."
+
+Nothing occurred during the first watch, and at the end of it I roused
+up the lieutenant and lay down.  I suspect that he had intended to keep
+on watch for the rest of the night; but I happened to awake, and
+insisted--finding he had had a long spell--on his lying down.  The young
+officer, therefore, rolling himself in his buffalo robe, was again
+quickly asleep.
+
+I sometimes walked up and down, my rifle in my hand; sometimes leaned
+against a tree, peering in every direction.  It could not then have
+wanted more than a couple of hours to dawn.  The only sounds which
+reached my ear were those from our animals as they cropped the rich
+grass, or the occasional scream of some night-bird in the forest.  The
+moon, too, was nearly at its full, and I was thus enabled to see objects
+at a distance distinctly.  I could judge pretty well of the hour by the
+appearance of the fire, on which, from time to time, I threw a few
+sticks to keep up the blaze.
+
+I was leaning against a tree, beginning to feel somewhat sleepy, and
+thinking that it would soon be time to call the lieutenant, when a sound
+as of something moving in the forest behind me struck on my ear.  I
+remained perfectly motionless, and again I heard the sound.  "It may be
+a bear," was my first thought; "but then, a bear moving among the bushes
+would make more noise than that.  It must be some human being; perhaps
+an Indian, who is watching an opportunity to shoot us down."
+
+I kept completely in the shade, while I turned my eyes in the direction
+from whence the sound came.  I thus hoped, should there be an enemy
+near, to get sight of him before he could discover me.
+
+On arousing the lieutenant, I told him of the sounds I had heard.
+
+"If there are Indians near, we had better at once go in search of them,"
+he answered.  "I have no fancy to be shot down, as you suppose it likely
+we may be; and as it will not do to leave our horses, I propose that we
+mount them, and try and push through the forest.  The moonlight will
+enable us to make our way without difficulty."
+
+I should have preferred going on foot, but, of course, there was a risk,
+as the lieutenant had observed, of our horses being carried off.  I
+therefore thought it wisest to agree to his proposal.
+
+Our animals were quickly saddled, and we at once pushed into the forest.
+After we had passed through the outer belt, the trees grew wide apart,
+and as we soon came to several broad glades, we had no difficulty in
+making our way.
+
+We had gone some distance, when suddenly my horse gave a start, and I
+caught sight of a figure, partly concealed by a tree, right ahead of me;
+but as I saw neither bow nor rifle-barrel, I had no fear of encountering
+an enemy.
+
+"Who is there?"  I asked.  "Come forth and show yourself.  We wish to be
+friends, and will not harm you."
+
+I rode on, and just then the moonbeams, shining amid the boughs, shed
+their light on the figure of a young girl, whose countenance and costume
+plainly showed that she was an Indian.  After surveying my companion and
+myself--apparently to ascertain who we were--she stepped forth from her
+place of concealment, and advanced fearlessly towards us.
+
+"How comes it that you are wandering in this forest by yourself?"  I
+asked.
+
+"My friends are not far off," she answered; "and they are your friends
+also.  I am Maysotta, the daughter of Winnemak.  Seeing the light of
+your fire, I approached your camp, in order to ascertain who you were;
+but as you concealed yourself, I was unable to do so.  As I had promised
+not to be long absent, I was returning to the camp of my people when you
+overtook me.  My father has directed us to come on here; while he has
+gone back to the farm to warn your friends that the Arrapahas have once
+more turned their faces northward, and are very likely to carry out
+their hostile intentions."
+
+"This is important information you give, Maysotta," I observed, "and we
+thank you for it.  Are you certain if is correct?"
+
+"My father is never deceived," she answered.  "He believes that the farm
+will certainly be attacked, and that if those living there are not
+prepared, they will run a great risk of being cut off."
+
+The lieutenant and I had dismounted, and were holding our horses by the
+bridle, while we talked to the Indian girl.
+
+"If I could get hold of these deserters, I should feel warranted in
+returning to assist your friends," observed the lieutenant to me.  "But
+do you think that we can depend upon the information this girl gives
+us?"
+
+"I feel sure that we may," I answered.  "And as I should not like to be
+absent while Clarice and Uncle Jeff are exposed to danger, I would
+certainly urge you to return.  Perhaps our friend here may be able to
+assist us in discovering the runaways!"
+
+I turned to Maysotta and asked her whether she or any of her people had
+seen the two truants, or had observed the light of a camp-fire anywhere
+in the forest.
+
+"Are you seeking for any one?" she asked.
+
+I told her that two of the lieutenant's men, forgetful of their duty,
+had gone off by themselves, and that they might now be of use, could
+they be discovered, in defending the farm.
+
+"Will they be punished for what they have done?" she inquired.
+
+I told the lieutenant what she said.
+
+"Not if they return to their duty," he answered.
+
+"Then I think I can lead you to where they are," said Maysotta.  "I
+observed the light of a small fire reflected in the sky some little way
+from this, and I feel sure that it must have been kindled by the men you
+speak of."
+
+"At all events, we will approach cautiously," said the lieutenant.  "If
+my men are there, we shall have no difficulty in recovering them; or
+should the fire prove to be at the camp of hostile Indians, we shall be
+able to retreat unobserved."
+
+Maysotta had no fear on the latter point, and advising us to picket our
+horses where we then were, she led the way towards the point she had
+described.  In many places the thick foliage prevented the moonbeams
+from penetrating through the forest, and we could with difficulty
+distinguish the figure of our conductress, at so rapid a rate did she
+glide on through the forest.
+
+"I hope that the girl is not deceiving us," observed the lieutenant.
+"Is it not possible that she may have been sent merely to beguile us
+into an ambush?"
+
+"I do not think that at all likely," I answered.  "There can be no doubt
+that she is the daughter of whom Winnemak told my sister Clarice, and
+that she has heard all about us from her father.  She is thus anxious to
+render us any service in her power."
+
+Maysotta, hearing us talking, stopped, and putting her finger to her
+lips, made us understand that we must be silent.  She then moved forward
+again, at a slower pace, keeping close in front of us.  After going a
+little farther, I observed the faint glare of a fire reflected on the
+loftier boughs of the trees.  As we advanced it grew brighter and
+brighter, some of the rays penetrating even through the bushes which
+concealed the fire itself.
+
+Maysotta now touched my arm, and pointing to the fallen trunk of a tree,
+observed, "Creep up there, and you will ascertain whether those are the
+people you are in search of."
+
+We cautiously made our way towards the point indicated; but even before
+we could lift our heads to look over the fallen trunk, the sound of
+Barney Gillooly's jovial voice reached our ears, accompanied by Klitz's
+guttural notes.
+
+The lieutenant was about to spring over the trunk and seize hold of the
+deserters at once, but I held him back.
+
+"Let us see what the fellows are about," I whispered; and we crept
+closer, keeping ourselves concealed by the bushes.
+
+Gillooly and Klitz were seated on the ground opposite each other, with
+the fire between them.  The Irishman was holding up a piece of venison,
+which he had just cooked, at the end of a stick, while Klitz held
+another piece to the fire.
+
+"Arrah! now, this illigint piece of meat will be enough to last us until
+we stop again for the night!" exclaimed Gillooly.  "I'll race you now,
+and see who can get his whack down the fastest.  If I win, you must hand
+over to me what remains of yours; and if you win, you shall have the
+remainder of my whack."
+
+"Dat would not be fair," answered Klitz.  "You got big mout and short
+body, and can stow away much faster dan I.  You eat your breakfast as
+fast as you like, but let me take mine at my ease."
+
+"Arrah! thin, here goes," cried Gillooly; and he began gnawing away with
+right good will at the _lump_ of venison.
+
+It was pretty evident that either he or Klitz must have managed to kill
+a deer, judging from the ample supply of meat they appeared to possess.
+Their rifles lay at a little distance, and close to their wheel-barrow,
+which seemed to be well loaded.  There was no danger, therefore, of
+their firing at us before they discovered who we were; and, besides,
+they were not likely men to offer any determined resistance.
+
+We amused ourselves for some little time in watching them; and certainly
+no two individuals could have afforded a greater contrast.  Gillooly
+went on eating, laughing, and drinking, diverting himself by quizzing
+his saturnine companion, who replied only occasionally, and in
+monosyllables.
+
+"We have had enough of this," at length whispered the officer to me.
+"If you will seize the Irishman, I will manage the Dutchman.  Hold your
+pistol to Gillooly's head, and he will be as quiet as a lamb.  I will
+treat Klitz in the same way."
+
+To bound over the trunk was the work of a moment, and the two deserters,
+greatly to their astonishment and dismay, found themselves in our power,
+without any hope of escape.
+
+"Where were you going, you rascals?" exclaimed the lieutenant.
+
+"Sure, your honour, a military life disagreed intirely wid me health,
+and I thought it best to take French leave, to save me comrades the
+trouble of burying me," answered Barney.  "Sure, I niver dreamed of
+deserting."
+
+"And you, Mr Klitz, what have you to say?" asked the lieutenant.
+
+"Dat I could not let dis fellow, like one big baby, go alone," answered
+the German; "so I went to take care of him."
+
+There was no use in bandying words just then, so the lieutenant ordering
+Klitz to take up the muskets, and Gillooly, as before, to trundle the
+wheel-barrow, we set off, guided by Maysotta, for the Indian camp.
+
+We found but few persons in the camp, and these chiefly women and
+children,--the men having accompanied their chief.  From the assurances
+Maysotta again gave us, we were convinced of the danger to which our
+friends were exposed.  The lieutenant accordingly at once decided to
+leave the baggage-mules behind, and, as the Indians could supply us with
+a couple of horses, to mount our two men, and return at full speed to
+the farm.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE.
+
+WE LEAVE THE INDIAN CAMP--MAYSOTTA'S KIND OFFER--OUR RIDE TO ROARING
+WATER--INDIANS IN THE DISTANCE--IN SIGHT OF THE FARM--A STRANGER
+INDIAN--OUR RECEPTION BY UNCLE JEFF--THE INDIAN'S STORY--HE GETS FOOD
+AND SHELTER--MATTERS NOW LOOK SERIOUS--A COUNCIL OF WAR--MY DOUBTS OF
+THE INDIAN--CLARICE AND RACHEL ACCOMPANY THE LIEUTENANT TO THE INDIAN
+CAMP--WE BARRICADE THE HOUSE--DISAPPEARANCE OF THE INDIAN--BARTLE GOES
+OUT TO RECONNOITRE--APPROACH OF THE ENEMY--A DETERMINED ATTACK--SEVERE
+LOSSES--THE OUT-BUILDINGS SET ON FIRE--OUR AMMUNITION RUNS SHORT--THE
+ROOF TAKES FIRE--HOW ARE WE TO ESCAPE?--UNCLE JEFF'S RUSE, AND HOW IT
+SUCCEEDED.
+
+The Indian girl readily undertook the charge of our baggage-mules and
+property, as well as of the deserters' wheel-barrow, which she promised
+should be sent back to the farm.  Having secured the muskets of the two
+men to our own saddles, we made them mount and ride on before us, so
+that they might have no opportunity of running away.  Gillooly pulled as
+long a face as his jovial countenance was capable of, while that of
+Klitz elongated even more than was its wont.
+
+"We shall probably have some sharp fighting, my lads; and if you behave
+well I intend to overlook your conduct; but if not, you must take the
+consequences," said the lieutenant.
+
+"Sure, if we get sight of an inemy, I will do nothing to disgrace the
+name of Gillooly," answered Barney.
+
+Klitz muttered something in German, but what it was I could not make
+out.  They were neither of them likely to fight for honour and glory; at
+the same time, I had little doubt but they would blaze away at an enemy,
+when they knew that by failing to do so they would lose their scalps.
+
+"Tell the `Fair Lily' that I have heard of the danger by which she is
+threatened, and that if she will come here Maysotta will take care of
+her, and cherish her as a sister," said the Indian girl, as I was about
+to vault into my saddle.
+
+I thanked her, and told her that I was sure Clarice would be glad to
+meet with her.  I was much struck by the artless manners of the young
+Indian girl, who, although endowed with the features of her race,
+possessed a beauty rarely seen among them.
+
+"Move on, lads; we must be at Roaring Water before nightfall," cried the
+lieutenant.  "Keep together, and do not pull rein until I give the
+order.  Remember that I will stand no nonsense; and the first of you who
+plays any trick, I will shoot him through the head."
+
+"Arrah! sure, we will be afther obeying your honour, thin," cried
+Barney, as he and Klitz galloped on ahead--the lieutenant giving them
+the order to turn to the right or to the left as was necessary.
+
+We kept on at a good pace.  The Indian mustangs, although somewhat
+small, were strong and wiry; and our horses, having had a good feed,
+were perfectly fresh.  The distance, therefore, which on the previous
+days--having our mules to drag after us--was slowly traversed, was now
+quickly got over.  But we had to call a halt at noon, by the side of a
+stream, in order to water our animals and let them feed; while we
+ourselves took some of the provender which we had brought in our
+wallets.
+
+Klitz and Barney sat down opposite to us, by the orders of the
+lieutenant, and ate their meal in silence.  They bore their
+disappointment very well.  Perhaps, after their three or four days'
+experience, they may have begun to suspect that they would not reach
+their El Dorado without some considerable difficulty, should they ever
+get there at all; and they possibly consoled themselves with the idea
+that, since they had been retaken, they were getting off very cheaply.
+
+Our meal over, we moved on as before.  I kept a sharp look-out by the
+way, and twice I caught sight of figures which I knew must be Indians,
+moving in the distance, but whether friends or foes it was impossible to
+say.  Perhaps they belonged to Winnemak's tribe; or, should Maysotta's
+account be correct, they might be Arrapahas.  They did not approach us,
+however, and we were allowed to proceed unmolested.
+
+Although we were moving along the line used by emigrant trains, we did
+not meet a single one; but it was possible that any coming from the
+eastward might have been attacked by the Arrapahas, or, hearing that an
+enemy was in the neighbourhood, might have halted for the purpose of
+defending themselves.  When Indians can manage to attack a train on the
+move, they, in most instances, prove successful; whereas even a small
+party of white men, when encamped and under the protection of their
+waggons, can generally keep a large band of warriors at bay.
+
+The fact of our not meeting with any emigrant trains made Maysotta's
+report more probable.  Of course I felt somewhat anxious about
+ourselves, for, even although we had a couple of rifles and two muskets,
+besides our pistols, we might find it a hard matter to drive off any
+large number of mounted assailants; but I felt far more anxious about
+the inmates of the farm.
+
+We kept the two men moving ahead of us at such a rate that Barney more
+than once cried out, "Sure, lieutenant, our bastes will have no wind
+left in thim at all, at all, if we don't pull up!"
+
+"Go on, go on," cried the lieutenant; "do not mind your beasts, as long
+as they can keep their legs."
+
+"Thin it's meself I'd be plading for," cried Barney, turning round.
+
+"Do not mind yourself either," answered the lieutenant.  "The lives of
+our friends are at stake, and if we are to help them we must get to the
+farm without delay."
+
+Whack, whack, whack went Barney's stick.  The German also urged forward
+his mustang in the same manner--his feet, from the length of his legs,
+nearly touching the ground.  Indeed, when passing through long grass,
+his feet were so completely hidden, that, as he kept moving his legs
+about all the time, it appeared as if he were running along with his
+horse under him.
+
+At length the mountains which rose above Roaring Water appeared in
+sight.  As we neared them I looked out eagerly from the summit of a
+ridge we had reached, to ascertain if any Indians were in the
+neighbourhood; but as none were to be seen, I hoped that we might reach
+the farm before any attack had been commenced.
+
+As we passed the confines of the property I saw none of our people
+about; but, as the evening was drawing on, I thought it probable that
+they had gone home from their work.  Still, I felt somewhat anxious; my
+anxiety being also shared by the lieutenant, who was making his tired
+beast breast the hill faster than he, as a humane man, would otherwise
+have done.
+
+As we got close to the house, an Indian started up from behind a copse
+which grew on the side of the hill.  He had neither war-paint nor
+ornaments on, and looked weary and travel-stained.  He was a young,
+active man; but, at the first glance, I did not like his countenance.  A
+person unaccustomed to Indians cannot easily distinguish one from
+another, although in reality they vary in appearance as much as white
+men do; as does also the expression of their countenances.
+
+"Are you going to the farm?" he asked, addressing me.  He knew at once
+by my dress that I was a settler.
+
+"Yes," I replied.  "Why do you put the question?"
+
+"I wish to go there too," he answered.  "I want to tell the Palefaces
+living there that they are likely to be attacked by enemies who have
+sworn to take their scalps, and that unless they run away they will all
+lose their lives."
+
+"You do not bring us news," I replied; "but you can accompany us to the
+farm and speak to the white chief, telling him what you know--although I
+do not think it likely that he will follow your advice."
+
+"Come on, come on, Ralph," cried the lieutenant; "do not lose time by
+talking to that fellow."
+
+I quickly overtook my companion; while the Indian followed,
+notwithstanding his tired appearance, at a speed which soon brought him
+up with us.
+
+As we rode up to the house, Uncle Jeff appeared at the door.
+
+"What has brought you back?" he exclaimed, with a look of surprise.
+"Glad to see you, at all events; for we have had our friend Winnemak
+here with news sufficient to make our hair stand on end, if it were
+addicted to anything of that sort.  He declares that the Arrapahas are
+coming on in overwhelming force, and that, unless we are well prepared
+for them, we shall one and all of us lose our scalps.  He has gone off
+again, though, promising to make a diversion in our favour, as he has
+been unable to get his people to come and assist in defending the farm,
+which would have been more to the purpose.  However, as you have
+returned,--and brought your two deserters, I see,--we shall be able to
+beat the varmints off.  No fear of it, though they may be as thick as a
+swarm of bees."
+
+A few words explained how we had fallen in with the runaways.
+
+The Indian who accompanied us then stepped forward.  He told Uncle Jeff
+that he was a Pawnee, that his name was Piomingo, and that, having a
+warm affection for the Palefaces, he had come to warn us of the danger
+in which we were placed, and to advise us forthwith to desert the farm
+and take to the mountains, for that we had not a chance of defending it
+against the numerous bands of Arrapahas who were advancing to attack us.
+They had, he said, put to death all the white men, as well as women and
+children, they had met with in their progress, as their manner was to
+spare no one; and they would certainly treat us in the same way.
+
+"We have already heard something of this," said Uncle Jeff, looking as
+unconcerned as he could; "but how did you happen to know about it?" he
+asked.
+
+"I was taken prisoner by the Arrapahas while on my way to visit a young
+squaw, who is to become my wife.  But on the night before I was to be
+tortured and put to death I managed to make my escape, and came on here
+at once to tell the Palefaces of their danger, of which I had heard when
+in the camp of the enemy."
+
+I suspected that Uncle Jeff did not altogether believe the account given
+by the Indian.  At any rate, he received it with perfect composure.
+
+"We thank you, friend Piomingo, for your good intentions.  You are now
+at liberty to pursue your journey on your intended visit to the young
+squaw of whom you speak," he answered.
+
+"I would follow the advice of the Paleface chief, but I am weary and
+hungry, and require sleep and rest.  He would not turn me away like a
+dog from his door!"
+
+"No, I will not do that," said Uncle Jeff.  "You shall have as much food
+as you require, and you can lie down and sleep until you are rested;
+after that, you shall be welcome to depart."
+
+The Indian expressed his gratitude in a much longer speech than the
+occasion required; but when Rachel brought some food he ate it
+voraciously, as if he really were as hungry as he had asserted.
+
+Clarice blushed and smiled, when the lieutenant told her how anxious he
+had been made by the report he had received from Maysotta, and how glad
+he was for the opportunity of returning.
+
+The sergeant was by this time much better, and able to move about.  Pat,
+too, had behaved very well.  The four farm hands had been brought into
+the house, and Sergeant Custis and Pat had been regularly drilling them,
+and teaching them how to handle their muskets properly.
+
+I found that Uncle Jeff considered matters far more serious than he had
+at first been willing to do.  Winnemak had been urging him to allow
+Clarice, attended by Rachel, to quit the farm--promising to conduct them
+to his daughter, and to afford them protection.  Should the farm be
+attacked, it was quite possible that the defenders might have, as a last
+resource, to cut their way out; and, encumbered with the two women, the
+risk they would have to run would be far greater than if they had only
+themselves to think of.
+
+"I cannot help acknowledging that our Indian friend's advice is sound,"
+observed Uncle Jeff.  "If we knew that Clarice and Rachel were safe, we
+should fight with far more freedom than we could do with them in the
+house.  And if matters came to the worst, we should, as he says, be able
+to escape with far less difficulty than if we had them to look after."
+
+"I am very unwilling to desert you," said the lieutenant; "but, under
+the circumstances, if you will confide your niece to my care, with her
+attendant, I will undertake to escort them to the Indian camp, where the
+chief's daughter is ready to receive her.  Indeed, the Indian girl
+proposed this herself, and seemed to be aware of what her father had
+advised you to do."
+
+While we were talking, I observed that the stranger was listening, and
+apparently doing his best to take in what we said.  Though he was a
+handsome young fellow, yet, as I before remarked, I did not like the
+expression of his countenance; it now struck me that it had a cunning,
+sinister look.  Whenever he saw my eyes directed towards him, he turned
+away, and appeared to be thinking only of the food he was eating.
+
+I have elsewhere alluded to my talent as an artist.  While Winnemak was
+with us, I had made a tolerably fair portrait of him; indeed, it was
+considered a good likeness, and was hung up against the wall.  As
+Piomingo was passing it, I saw him start in a way an Indian seldom does;
+and he then stood gazing earnestly at it for a minute or more.
+
+"Who is that man?" he asked, pointing to the portrait.
+
+I told him.
+
+"Ah, bad man!" he muttered; "take care what he do."
+
+"We think him a good man; he is a friend of ours."
+
+He shook his head, but said nothing more.  After this, instead of lying
+down, he stole near to where Uncle Jeff, the lieutenant, and I were
+talking; although, unless he knew English much better than he seemed to
+do, he could not have been any the wiser.
+
+Uncle Jeff considered seriously the proposal made by Winnemak, and now
+repeated by the lieutenant.
+
+"Yes," he said at length, "I am sure it is the best plan.  I will
+entrust my niece and Rachel to your charge.  I conclude you will take
+your men with you!  Indeed, although we can ill spare any hands, I wish
+Ralph to accompany you, if you will allow him."
+
+"You may trust me, Mr Crockett, that I will defend your niece and her
+attendant with my life; but I shall be very glad to have the aid of your
+nephew," answered Lieutenant Broadstreet.  "With regard to my own men, I
+propose taking only the most trustworthy, Sergeant Custis and Sperry;
+the other two I will leave with you, for they will, at all events, fight
+as well as better men within walls, and I can more readily spare them
+than the others."
+
+On hearing this arrangement, I was placed in a dilemma.  I did not at
+all like the idea of being compelled to quit the post of danger; while
+at the same time I felt it was my duty to assist in protecting Clarice.
+I told the lieutenant how I felt on the subject.
+
+"I will speak to your uncle," he answered; "and if you wish to remain, I
+will assure him that your coming is not absolutely necessary.  We may
+hope to reach the Indian camp early to-morrow, and your sister will then
+be placed under the charge of the Indian chief and his daughter."
+
+When I put the question to Clarice, she replied,--"I would infinitely
+rather have you with me; but if you believe that it is your duty to
+remain with Uncle Jeff, I could not bear the thought of your leaving
+him.  Besides, he seems to be confident that he will be able to beat off
+the enemy, should the farm be attacked."
+
+I confess that I was in two minds on the subject until the last moment.
+
+The plans being arranged, no time was lost in making the necessary
+preparations.  The horses which had been selected for the journey having
+been well fed and watered, were brought to the door.  Clarice was soon
+ready.  She was a good horse-woman, and even Rachel had been accustomed
+to the saddle in former years.
+
+I wrung my friend's hand.
+
+"You will take care of my sister, I know you will," I said as I parted
+from him.
+
+"Indeed, Ralph, I will," he answered solemnly; and I felt that she was
+as safe as she would have been had I accompanied her.
+
+The moon was now shining brightly, and enabled the lieutenant and his
+companions to pursue their way at a rapid rate.  They took no baggage
+except such as could be strapped to the saddles of their horses; they
+were, therefore, not impeded as we had been by slow-moving mules.  It
+was nearly midnight when they set off; and as little noise as possible
+was made when they left the house, in case any of the enemy's scouts
+watching in the neighbourhood might hear them.
+
+The stranger Indian had, some time before the party set off, thrown
+himself on a buffalo robe in a corner of the room, and was apparently
+asleep; but I suspected that he knew pretty well all that was going
+forward.  He remained, however, without moving, as if in a sound
+slumber.
+
+As soon as Uncle Jeff and I returned (we had accompanied our friends a
+little way down the hill), Uncle Jeff addressed his small garrison.
+
+"Putting all things together, lads," said he, "I believe these Redskin
+varmints whom we have been hearing of for some days past will really at
+last make an attempt to rob the farm; but I know that you will fight to
+the last, and we shall manage to drive them off.  There is no reason why
+we should not feel confident of success.  We have a good store of powder
+and bullets, with trustworthy rifles and muskets; and what more, pray,
+can men wish for?"
+
+The men, one and all, promised to stand by him.
+
+"That is all I want," he answered.  "The first thing we have to do is to
+barricade the lower windows and the doors, so that while we are
+defending one side the Indians may not walk in at the other."
+
+There were ten of us altogether, and having abundance of tools and
+materials, we soon put the building in a state of defence, with
+loopholes on all sides.  Before the doors were finally closed, Uncle
+Jeff told Bartle to bring in his favourite horse "Jack;" the remainder
+of the animals had been turned loose to seek their own safety.
+
+The day dawned, but as nothing had yet been seen of our expected
+enemies, Bartle agreed to go out and ascertain their whereabouts as soon
+as the sun rose above the horizon.  Bartle was too old a scout to care
+whether he had to approach an enemy in daylight or darkness; his only
+object at present was to find out if the Indians were really marching
+towards the farm.
+
+While we were busily engaged in barricading the house, no one had
+thought of our Redskin visitor.  When last seen he was apparently
+wrapped in slumber.
+
+"I suppose we may count on Piomingo as one of the defenders of the
+house; he probably knows how to use a rifle," observed Uncle Jeff, near
+whom I was working.  "Go and speak to him.  Say that we expect him to do
+his duty; and ask him if he knows how to load a rifle."
+
+As soon as I had finished the work I was about, I went to where Piomingo
+had been lying down.  He was not there; I looked everywhere about for
+him, but he had disappeared.  No one had seen him leave the house, so
+that, if he was not still within, he must have watched his opportunity
+when our eyes were off him, and slipped out.
+
+What his object was in coming, and then going away secretly, it was
+difficult to say.  His departure was suspicious, too; he might have
+visited us with treacherous intentions.  But perhaps he was merely a
+coward, and finding that we would not take his advice and desert the
+farm, he had escaped, to avoid the danger to which he would be exposed.
+However, if he intended treachery, it was better to have him out of the
+way.
+
+"Maybe, afther all, the spalpeen is hiding somewhere," observed
+Gillooly, when he found that we were inquiring for the Indian; "if he is
+anywhere inside, sure I'll ferret him out;" and the Irishman immediately
+began poking his nose into every hole and cranny in the building.
+
+"Bedad! he's convarted himself into a rat, for nowhere can I find him in
+any hole that a mortal man could stow himself into!" exclaimed Barney,
+after a long search.
+
+I have not yet described the building which, if we were attacked, was to
+serve as our fortress.  It was of considerable size; the lower part of
+the walls consisting of stout logs, the upper portion being of
+framework, and boarded.  Round three sides was a stout palisade, forming
+an enclosure, while the remaining side was occupied by stables and other
+out-buildings.  Barns, cow-sheds, and piggeries were placed at some
+little distance off.  Then there was the hut occupied by the farm hands;
+while overhanging the stream, which flowed by on one side, was a small
+mill, the wheel of which was turned by its waters.
+
+The hills rose on either side, but too far off to allow an enemy to
+command the house from them; while the intervening space was rough and
+rocky,--forming shelter, however, to an approaching foe.  Had we felt
+sure that we would be attacked, we should have been wise to have
+destroyed many of these out-buildings, as they were calculated to
+protect the enemy.  But to the last Uncle Jeff was not fully persuaded
+that the Indians would venture to approach the place, as they must have
+known that we were prepared for their reception.
+
+The day drew on, but still Bartle did not return; and we began to hope
+that after all no enemy would appear.  But about noon, and just as we
+were making ready to sit down to dinner, he was seen approaching the
+house with rapid strides.
+
+"There is no doubt about what these varmints intend!" he exclaimed as he
+rushed into the house.  "They are coming on as fast as their legs can
+carry them, and will be here before the day is much older.  Look to your
+firearms, lads; we must be ready for them, and give them such a dose of
+bullets that they will wish they hadn't come to Roaring Water."
+
+In accordance with Bartle's advice, all the doors and windows were fast
+closed, and we were shut up in our fortress.
+
+"It is ill to fight on empty stomachs, so turn to and eat your dinner,
+lads; I'll give you notice when you are wanted."
+
+Uncle Jeff having thus spoken, mounted to a window commanding the road
+by which the enemy were likely to approach; and there, after snatching a
+hasty meal, I quickly joined him.  I first, however, took a glance out
+of another window, opening to the southward, as it was possible that
+some of the Indians might make their way over the hills so as to take us
+on the flank.
+
+To each man was given his particular post, at which he was to remain
+until summoned elsewhere.
+
+The time now seemed to go by very slowly.
+
+"I do not think they will come, after all," I observed to Uncle Jeff;
+"more than an hour has passed since Bartle returned."
+
+He looked at his watch.  "It is not one o'clock yet," he observed; "and
+Bartle does not often make a mistake."
+
+Just as he spoke, I saw the plumes of a chief's head-dress rising over a
+point of rocky ground round which the road passed, and shortly
+afterwards a band of painted warriors came into view.  They approached
+very cautiously, and gazed about them, as if expecting at any moment to
+encounter an enemy.  Finding, however, that none of us were visible,
+they began to advance at a more rapid rate.  Immediately afterwards I
+saw another and a much larger party coming over the hill, who, as they
+drew near, scattered themselves in every direction, so as to be able to
+get under shelter behind the intervening rocks and shrubs.
+
+"Tell the men to be ready," cried Uncle Jeff; "and charge them not to
+fire until I give the word,--they must not throw a shot away."
+
+I ran hastily round the building, and ascertained that every man was at
+his post, prepared for whatever might happen.  I then returned to Uncle
+Jeff for further orders.
+
+Presently an Indian belonging to the party which had descended the hill
+advanced towards the house with a white handkerchief on a pole.
+
+"The fellows have some pretensions to civilisation," said Uncle Jeff
+when he saw it; "perhaps their white friends have put them up to that."
+
+The Indian, having got within speaking distance, now halted; but seeing
+no one whom he could address, he proceeded around the building,
+apparently examining our preparations for defence.  At length he again
+stopped, having satisfied himself that the building was fortified, and
+contained a garrison.
+
+"Friends," he shouted, "do you want to lose your scalps?  If not, march
+out and leave this house to us.  We mean to come in."
+
+Uncle Jeff now appeared at the window opposite to where the Indian was
+standing.
+
+"Clear out of this, you rascal!" he exclaimed.  "We do not intend that
+you shall have our scalps, or get inside these walls.  If you make the
+attempt, you will pay dearly for it; that is what I've got to say."
+
+The Indian seemed to recognise Uncle Jeff.  "You, Jeff Crockett," he
+shouted out, "you good man!  If you like to go out you may go, and we
+take scalps of rest."
+
+Uncle Jeff burst into a loud laugh.
+
+"That's a likely thing," he thundered out.  "If it was not for your
+white flag, I would treat you as you deserve."
+
+The tone of voice in which this was said convinced the Indian that Uncle
+Jeff was in earnest; and in no very dignified fashion he scampered off
+to rejoin his companions.
+
+The whole of the band now united in giving utterance to a terrific
+war-whoop, and came rushing up to the house.  There was no longer any
+doubt as to their intentions; they halted for a moment to fire, and then
+came right on at a rapid pace, up to the palisade.
+
+"Now, lads, give it them!" shouted Uncle Jeff; and every bullet fired by
+our little garrison brought down one of our foes.
+
+The death of their companions served but to inflame the rage of the
+rest; and climbing up over the palisade of which I have spoken, they
+attempted to get into the enclosure.  Several were shot down in the act;
+but others succeeded in reaching the enclosure, though they soon paid
+dearly for their activity, as they were shot down as soon as we could
+reload our rifles.  The loss of so many men in their first attack seemed
+to discourage the rest, and they drew off to a distance, under such
+shelter as they could find.
+
+"We have soon settled the fellows; they have had enough of it," cried
+some of our men.
+
+"Wait a bit, lads," said Bartle; "that is not the Indian fashion.  They
+will be upon us again before long."
+
+He was right; in a few minutes a considerable number of the enemy were
+seen moving round, in order to get to the rear of the out-buildings--
+Bartle and Gideon meanwhile picking off two or three who incautiously
+exposed themselves.  Having gained the position they desired, they made
+a rush towards the buildings, which sheltered them almost entirely from
+our fire.  Breaking through the enclosure on that side, they next
+advanced boldly into the open space in front of the stables, where they
+were once more exposed to view.  Scarcely had they reached it when
+Bartle's unerring rifle brought down their leader.  His followers, on
+seeing this, rushed into the stables, while others made their appearance
+in the same direction.
+
+Either because they fancied that their chief was still alive, or that it
+was a disgrace to allow his body to remain on the ground, a couple of
+warriors dashed out for the purpose of carrying it off; but before they
+had time to stoop down and lift it from the ground, Gideon and Bartle's
+rifles had laid them both by its side.  Two others followed, and were
+picked off by Gillooly and Klitz, both of whom showed themselves no
+despicable shots.  In the meantime Bartle and Gideon had reloaded, and
+two more warriors shared the fate of the first.
+
+As yet, all the success had been on our side; and there appeared every
+probability of our being able to defeat any attempt of the enemy to
+enter the building.  Those who had got into the stables were so many
+withdrawn from the attack; and although under shelter, they could effect
+nothing against us.  Had the Indians been alone, we might have kept them
+at bay, cunning as they were; but there were white men among them, who,
+although not eager to expose their own lives, were well able to assist
+our enemies by their advice.
+
+Presently our assailants, with the exception of those in the stables and
+other out-buildings, retreated.  It was but for a short time, however;
+soon they appeared on the opposite side of the house, many of them
+carrying burning brands, which they threw under the fencing.  This being
+of combustible materials, soon blazed up; and, sheltered by the
+intervening flames and smoke, the enemy opened a hot fire on us.  Every
+now and then, however, a dark form was seen, and as surely a bullet
+searched it out.  But the whole of our little garrison was now required
+to keep the enemy at bay on this side; and those who had been hidden in
+the out-buildings took the opportunity of making their escape.  Some of
+them, we found, had thrown themselves into the mill, which afforded them
+sufficient shelter to fire steadily at our loopholes with less risk of
+being hit in return.  None of us had hitherto been struck, but no sooner
+had the mill been taken possession of than two of the farm hands, who
+were less cautious than the experienced hunters, were badly wounded--one
+of them mortally, while the other was unable to handle his rifle.
+
+The palisade being now burned to the ground, we were deprived of its
+protection, and our assailants could consequently get close up to the
+walls.  But though our numbers were diminished, we endeavoured, by the
+rapidity of our fire, not to let the enemy discover our loss.
+
+The fight had now continued for some hours, but still our foes seemed as
+determined as ever to capture the place.  They, or perhaps the white
+men, had heard a report that Uncle Jeff was the owner of fabulous
+wealth, of which they had resolved to make themselves the possessors.
+This would account for their obstinate perseverance.
+
+Fresh bands continued to arrive, too; and after a cessation of firing, a
+shower of arrows, from enemies concealed behind the rocks, came flying
+over the house.  Had they been simply arrows, they would not have done
+much harm; but, to our dismay, we saw that each one carried a piece of
+burning tow; and if these fell on the shingles of the roof, they would
+too probably set them on fire.  To extinguish the flames, too, we should
+have to expose ourselves to a great risk of being shot.  Happily, as yet
+the arrows either flew over the building, or the tow fell out, and as
+far as we could discover no damage had been done.  Some, however, struck
+the out-buildings; and the roofs of these being thatched, they were soon
+in flames.  The barns, too, were set on fire, and blazed furiously.
+
+Night at length came on, but it brought us no respite; for our savage
+foes could be seen, by the light from the burning out-buildings, still
+hovering in vast numbers round us.  Suddenly, too, the granary burst
+into flames, making the night almost as bright as the day.  It enabled
+us, however, to see our foes more clearly, and of this we did not fail
+to take advantage.  We prudently retained only light enough in the house
+to enable us to see our way about; and we were thus comparatively
+concealed, while they were exposed to view.
+
+We might have still kept the enemy at bay, had not the other two field
+hands both been struck down, in the same manner as their companions.  We
+were now only six, opposed, as it appeared to us, to several hundred
+foes.  Still no one dreamed of giving in.
+
+Klitz and Gillooly behaved admirably, and did much to retrieve their
+character.  They always kept together--Klitz kneeling down to fire,
+while Gillooly sprang now on one side, then on the other, of his
+loophole, as he fired his rifle through it.
+
+Our position had become very critical; the wind might at any moment
+bring the flames of the out-buildings against the house itself, in which
+case our fate would be sealed, for it would be almost impossible for us
+to extinguish them.
+
+At length, to our relief, the enemy again drew off.  From their previous
+daring conduct, we could not hope, however, that they intended to raise
+the siege; perhaps they only waited to see whether the flames from the
+out-buildings would set the house on fire, and thus save them all
+further trouble and danger.  But the wind, fortunately, continued to
+blow up the valley, keeping the flames away from the house.
+
+Uncle Jeff now directed me to go round and give some food to each man.
+When I came to him, "Ralph," said he, "go and look into the
+ammunition-chest.  I have my fears that we are running short of
+cartridges!"
+
+I did as directed, and what was my dismay to find that no more than
+three rounds remained for each one of us!  One of the poor fellows who
+had been last hit had been employed in supplying us with cartridges, and
+he had omitted to tell Uncle Jeff how short we had run.
+
+"I wish I had let you go, Ralph," he said; "but it cannot be helped now.
+We must cut our way out; it is possible that all of us who are alive
+may succeed.  If the enemy come on again, we must begin blazing away at
+them as before; then, when our last shot is expended, we must burst open
+the door and dart out.  Call Bartle and Gideon, and I will tell them
+what I propose doing.  You and they are active, and know the country,
+and if you can reach the mountains you may get off free; although it
+will go hard, I fear, with the two troopers."
+
+His two old followers, on hearing that the ammunition was almost
+expended, agreed that it was the only course to pursue with any chance
+of saving our lives.
+
+Fortunately there were several swords, and we each of us provided
+ourselves with one, and besides this we had a pistol apiece.
+
+"Now, then," said Uncle Jeff, "I propose doing what will look like
+deserting you, but in reality it is the best plan for saving your lives.
+I am thinking of dressing up a figure, and placing it on Jack's back,
+so as to partly cover me when I am mounted; and I will conceal myself by
+hanging over along his neck.  I will then dash out ahead of you, when
+the enemy are certain to direct their fire at me, though I hope that
+they will hit the figure instead.  You, in the meantime, can make up the
+valley; and as you know every inch of the ground, you will soon distance
+them.  What say you to my proposal, Bartle?"
+
+"It is as good as any I can think of," answered Bartle.  "I wish you
+would let me ride the horse, though, for I think you run a greater risk
+than any of us."
+
+"No, no," answered Uncle Jeff; "although that may be true, it is my duty
+to you all.  And Jack knows me better than any one else; it won't be his
+fault if he doesn't carry me clear."
+
+I at once began to consider how I could make such a figure as would
+answer Uncle Jeff's purpose, and as I was of an ingenious turn, I was
+not long, with the aid of some pliable laths and some strips of
+cow-hide, in making the framework; the arms I formed in the attitude of
+holding the reins.  The framework once formed, it was quickly clothed in
+the costume generally worn by Uncle Jeff; and as I placed it with the
+legs over a chair, it was allowed that, on a dark night, it might
+deceive those not prepared for the trick to be played upon them.
+
+Jack, who had been busy munching his hay in a corner of the room, was
+now saddled, and the figure placed in position, and secured with straps
+round the body; while Uncle Jeff himself, stripped to his trousers, hung
+over in the attitude he proposed.  Looking across the dimly-lighted
+room, we could scarcely perceive him.
+
+"That will do," cried Bartle enthusiastically; "it will give you a
+better chance of escape, at all events."
+
+We had reason to be thankful that the Indians gave us so long a time for
+preparation.  The night was now advancing, and any doubts that we might
+have entertained as to their having taken their departure were soon
+dissipated, for once more showers of fiery arrows came flying over and
+against the house--shot, however, from a distance.  Several whistled
+through the loopholes, but none of us were hit, and these were of course
+immediately extinguished.
+
+I was in the upper story, when, looking up, to my dismay I saw a bright
+light overhead; the roof had been set on fire.  Under other
+circumstances we might have attempted to extinguish it; as it was, I ran
+to tell Uncle Jeff what had occurred.
+
+"Then the time has come, my lads, when we must cut our way out.  God
+protect one and all of us.  Would that I could help you further."
+
+We shook hands round, and Bartle and Gideon stood by with their axes to
+knock away the barricade.  Uncle Jeff mounted Jack, and secured the
+figure behind him.  Some time passed, however, before he gave the word.
+The enemy were close at hand, but they were concentrated, as far as we
+could judge by the sounds which reached us, on one side of the house,
+and Uncle Jeff would be able to pass by them, and thus leave the road
+open for us.
+
+A few strokes cleared away the barricade.  Uncle Jeff was to dash out
+first, Bartle and Gideon were to follow, they understanding that I
+should keep between them, while Klitz and Gillooly were to bring up the
+rear.
+
+"Now open the door!" cried Uncle Jeff.
+
+Just as he spoke I looked around, and discovered that neither Klitz nor
+Gillooly was behind me.  What had become of them I could not tell; and
+there was no time to consider, for the door was thrown open, and out
+dashed Uncle Jeff, directing his course by the path down the valley.
+
+For some seconds he was not observed by the enemy, until he went
+clattering away down the steep path at a pace which would have brought
+many a steed on his knees.  But Jack knew what he was about.  Not until
+Uncle Jeff found that the enemy had seen him did he utter a sound.  He
+then gave vent to a loud shout, which rang through the air, echoing from
+rock to rock.  It had the effect he intended, and drew the attention of
+our foes to him.  A shower of bullets went whistling through the figure
+and on either side of it; still the horse kept on his way uninjured.
+
+The Indians, who had their horses tethered below, mounted in haste, and
+pushed on in hot chase.  But Uncle Jeff was on ahead of them, so,
+casting off the straps which bound the figure, he let it fall to the
+ground, whilst he, recovering his proper position, turned round, and
+shaking his fist at his astonished foes, continued his course at
+increased speed.
+
+We of course could not see what occurred, but we heard of it afterwards.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX.
+
+WE ARE SURPRISED BY THE INDIANS WHILE LEAVING THE HOUSE--BARTLE'S
+ADVICE--I AM PERSUADED TO ESCAPE ALONE--AN EXCITING PURSUIT--FOOD AND
+REST--MY JOURNEY RESUMED--AMONG THE MOUNTAINS--MY ANXIETY ABOUT MY
+FRIENDS--A WEARY DAY--AN INDIAN IN SIGHT--FRIEND OR ENEMY?--A
+RECOGNITION--WINNEMAK AND HIS BRAVES--I AM KINDLY TREATED--NO NEWS OF
+UNCLE JEFF--A SPY--WE START IN PURSUIT OF HIM--THE SPY OVERTAKEN--A
+DEADLY COMBAT--WINNEMAK OVERCOMES PIOMINGO--IS HE DEAD?--MY
+INTERCESSION--ON THE WAY FOR WINNEMAK'S CAMP.
+
+The furious rush made by Uncle Jeff had, as he expected, so distracted
+the attention of our numerous enemies surrounding the house, that they
+did not at first notice Bartle, Gideon, and me.  We were thus able to
+get to some distance from the house, and had hopes of escaping
+altogether unobserved, when the party who had been concealed in the mill
+caught sight of us, and uttering a loud war-whoop, rushed out expecting
+to take our scalps.  Bartle and Gideon shot down with their pistols two
+of our assailants; and I cut down a third, who had sprung before us to
+stop our progress.  Others soon came on, but we managed to keep them at
+bay, although it was too probable that ere long we should be
+overwhelmed, as others were coming up from all directions to join the
+fight.  But so well did my companions wield their swords, that they for
+some time kept the enemy back.
+
+"Now, lad," cried Bartle to me, "now is your time; run for it, and you
+will get off free!  Gideon and I will manage these fellows; never fear,
+we will look after ourselves."
+
+I hesitated to desert my faithful friends.
+
+"Go, I say--go, Ralph!" again cried Bartle.  "It will make it more
+difficult for us to escape if you remain."
+
+It was probable, I saw, that Bartle and Gideon, with their great
+strength and activity, might by themselves be able to cut their way
+through a host of foes, although with me to protect they might find the
+task too great even for them.
+
+"Good-bye, then; I hope we shall meet all right before long," I
+exclaimed.
+
+"Never fear, lad," cried Bartle, as I bounded off up the canon, my rifle
+at my back, with three spare cartridges, and my pistol in my belt.
+
+For some seconds the Indians did not observe what I was about, and I
+soon had a good start of them.  When at length they did catch sight of
+my figure, dimly seen in the gloom of early morning, for it was scarcely
+yet daylight, several started off in chase.  I saw that they were
+coming, but I did not stop to count their number.  I was well acquainted
+with every inch of the ground, which it was not likely that they were,
+and I knew I should have abundance of hiding-places between the rocks
+and crags, among which I might baffle pursuit.  My purpose then was to
+cross the torrent at a narrow part where a tree hung over it, and to
+make to the northward, where I hoped to join Uncle Jeff and Clarice at
+Winnemak's camp.
+
+The Indians, however, had no intention of allowing me to escape.  On
+they came, uttering loud shrieks and shouts, expecting to strike terror
+into my heart, and make me yield.  Two or three were in advance of the
+rest, and one especially seemed to be gaining on me.  I would not
+willingly have taken his life, but too probably, should I not stop his
+progress, he would take mine.  Having reached a rock, I sprang behind
+it; then unslinging my rifle, I stepped out and took steady aim at the
+advancing foe, who fell back shot through the body.  His fall had the
+effect of stopping the others, who lifted him up to ascertain if he were
+dead, thus affording me time to reload my rifle, and gain several more
+yards in advance.  I could thus bring down another enemy, if necessary,
+at a distance, and still have my pistol and sword to defend myself in a
+closer encounter.
+
+I had not forgotten my two brave friends.  I only wished that they had
+accompanied me, for we might, on the ground I had now reached, have set
+a whole host of our enemies at defiance.
+
+I sprang on among the rocks, almost entirely concealed from the view of
+my pursuers.  Few of them, fortunately, had firearms, although an
+occasional ill-aimed bullet whistled over my head, but I had very little
+fear of being struck while among the rocks.  My great object was to
+reach the tree over the torrent before the Indians came up, because I
+should be exposed to view when climbing along the trunk.
+
+I dashed on, and mounting the rock still unobserved, reached the root of
+the tree.  It would be necessary to use great caution as I approached
+the further end, as only the more delicate branches hung over the
+stream, and should I venture on one incapable of bearing my weight I
+should fall into the torrent, which there went roaring by at a fearful
+rate.  This very circumstance, however, should I succeed, would secure
+my safety, as, even should the Indians discover by what means I had
+crossed, they would not venture to follow; or if they did, would most
+probably fall into the current and be swept away.
+
+I did not stop to ascertain how far off my pursuers were, but, climbing
+up on the trunk, I made my way along it--trusting to the uncertainty of
+their aim, should any with muskets see me and fire.  My great object was
+now to discover a bough on which I could depend.  I cast my eye along
+one, as far as the light would allow, and selected it; then, like a wild
+cat about to spring on its prey, I crawled quickly on.  There were
+several branches below me, which, should the one I was on give way,
+would still afford me support, and there were many on either side.  The
+bough bent with my weight, and as I reached the further end I every
+moment expected that it would break.  I felt it giving way, cracking
+horribly.  It broke!  I endeavoured to seize another bough--in vain.
+With a crash, down I came, but it was to find myself on the opposite
+bank, and by making a few springs I reached the upper ground.
+
+On looking back to ascertain if the Indians had found out the way by
+which I had crossed, I could see no one, but I caught sight in the
+distance of a bright glare, which I was too certain was caused by our
+burning house, every part of which by this time must have been in
+flames.  I did not stop, however, to contemplate the sad scene, but
+pushed on as fast as I was able.  I could not trust to the Indians not
+pursuing me, for I knew, when intent on an object, that they will run
+every danger rather than abandon it, and the death of their companion
+would make them still more eager to kill me than might otherwise have
+been the case.  On, therefore, I sprang.  I could still hear them,
+although I believed they had not seen me cross by the tree, or perhaps
+even had not discovered the tree itself, as it was concealed by an
+intervening rock.  I hoped that they would fancy I had taken the way
+further up the canon, and would pursue in that direction.  I might
+therefore proceed at a less furious pace than I had hitherto been going.
+Still, I resolved to leave nothing to chance, but to follow my course
+until the Indians had given up the pursuit.
+
+Stopping to listen a moment, I could hear their voices.  Again I went on
+as fast as before.  Now I had a mountain to scale; now to make my way
+along its steep side; now to descend into a valley; now to wade across a
+stream which threatened to carry me off my legs; now to climb another
+height: and so on I went, until I was conscious that my strength was
+failing me.  At length, completely exhausted, I sank down beneath an
+overhanging rock.  It afforded me some shelter from the fiery rays of
+the sun, which had now risen high in the sky.
+
+I had drunk at a spring on my way, but I again felt painfully thirsty.
+Could I obtain some water, I should be greatly relieved; but I was not
+likely to find it without further exertion, and of that I was incapable.
+I had brought a little food in my wallet, according to Uncle Jeff's
+advice before we left the house, and this I believe was the means of
+saving my life.  Although it was dry, it gave me some strength.
+
+I remained in a sort of stupor, scarcely conscious of what had occurred;
+and some hours, I suspect, went by, before I attempted to resume my
+journey.  I had no desire to spend the night in this exposed part of the
+mountains.  The scenery around Roaring Water was wild enough, but this
+appeared to me wilder still.  Lofty broken cliffs rose on either side of
+me.  So broken and irregular were their fantastic forms, that I could
+fancy myself amid the ruins of some Egyptian temple.  It seemed to be a
+gateway, as it were, to some still wilder or more wonderful region, as
+yet unexplored by the foot of man.  I had never been thus far before,
+and had very just fears, should darkness come on, of losing my way.  I
+therefore pushed forward as fast as my strength would allow, in the hope
+of coming upon water, and kept a sharp look-out in every direction to
+find indication of it.
+
+The sun had crossed the mountains, and was sinking towards the west; in
+a short time the shadows of their peaks would be thrown over the ground
+upon which I was travelling.  Stopping for a moment, I heard the sound
+of water rushing over a rocky bed, and hurrying forward I found myself
+beside a foaming stream.  I had, however, to seek for a path by which I
+could descend, before I could slake my thirst.  At last I got to a place
+where, lying at full length, and holding on with one hand by the branch
+of a bush, I could lift the water with the other to my mouth.  It seemed
+impossible to get enough; but at last I felt that I ought to take no
+more.
+
+The ground being tolerably practicable along the bank of the stream, I
+proceeded in that direction, desirous of reaching a lower region before
+nightfall; and as I went along I resolved to seek for some bushes or an
+overhanging rock, under which to take shelter for the night.
+
+I had now very little fear of being overtaken; indeed, the Indians would
+probably have lost my trail in the streams I had crossed, while the
+rocky nature of the ground would scarcely bear marks sufficient for even
+their acute eyes to discover.  I knew that as yet I could not be abreast
+of Winnemak's camp, and, indeed, that across the mountains it would
+probably take me two or three days to reach it.  Still I felt that it
+would be prudent, in case the Indians should be scouring the country in
+the plains, to keep to the mountains for another whole day or so.
+
+Just at dusk I saw a spot at which, from the appearance of the water, I
+judged that I could cross the torrent.  "I will put that, at all events,
+between myself and my enemies, should they be pursuing me," I thought,
+and without further hesitation I waded towards the opposite shore.  The
+water rose higher and higher.  I had, I feared, been deceived by the
+light, and might have to swim for it.  The danger of this was, that I
+might lose my rifle, and wet my pistol and ammunition.  Very thankful,
+therefore, was I when the water again shallowed; and, keeping my feet in
+spite of the rush against my legs, I at last got to the bank to which I
+was directing my course.
+
+I now continued down the stream until I reached a rock which almost
+overhung it, with bushes on either side.  This, I saw, would afford me
+as secure a resting-place as I could expect to find.  I accordingly
+resolved to stop; and having examined the locality on the further side,
+in case I should have to beat a retreat, I sat down and took some food,
+of which I still had a small portion left.  The air was tolerably warm,
+and, fatigued as I was, I should under ordinary circumstances have
+slumbered soundly; but as it was I felt very little inclination to
+sleep.  I was too anxious about Uncle Jeff, and Bartle, and Gideon.  Had
+Uncle Jeff escaped the bullets of the enemy; and had the others managed
+to cut their way through the horde of savages?  The white men in company
+with the Redskins, I looked upon as no better than they were.  What,
+too, had become of the German and the Irishman?  Had they, afraid of
+fighting in the open, remained in the house, and fallen victims to the
+flames?  Such, indeed, must have been the fate of the poor wounded
+fellows left in the house.  My only satisfaction was, that we had done
+all that men could do, and that we could not have saved their lives,
+although we should, to a certainty, have sacrificed our own had we made
+the attempt.  Still I had an idea that Barney and Klitz had some plan of
+their own for escaping, and that they might turn up some day or other.
+I half expected to find that Bartle and Gideon had followed me, and I
+looked out eagerly, hoping to see them.  How far I had come I could not
+exactly calculate, but I knew that, at the rate I had been moving, it
+must be a considerable distance.
+
+At length, overcome by fatigue, I fell asleep, trusting that He by whom
+I had been mercifully preserved would watch over me.  When I at last
+awoke, daylight was glancing across the foaming waters, the only sound I
+heard being that of their roar as they rushed over their rocky bed
+towards the valley below.  I knelt down and prayed, as I had been
+accustomed to do from my childhood; and then, before resuming my
+journey, I took some of the scanty remains of the food I had brought
+with me, which I washed down with a draught from the stream.
+
+Finding a practicable path to the left over the mountains, I followed
+it, still resolved not to trust myself in the neighbourhood of our foes.
+They could not have travelled over the mountains by night, but they
+might take it into their heads to follow me by day, and it would be
+unwise to linger.  I did not slacken my speed, either, for if they did
+come they would move as fast as I could, and I might be overtaken.  I
+stopped only occasionally, to eat a little food and to take a draught of
+water, of which I now found abundance by the way.
+
+I cannot fully describe the events of that day.  On and on I went, like
+a deer chased by the hunters.  Sometimes I would fancy that I heard the
+war-whoops of the Indians behind me; at others the sounds which I
+conjured up appeared to be uttered by Bartle or Gideon.  I would stop to
+listen, but only the roar of some distant waterfall or the murmur of a
+nearer rapid struck my ear.  Or now and again I heard the cry of some
+bird of prey, as it swooped down from its lofty eyrie towards the
+carcass which it had espied far off on the plain below.
+
+Again I was becoming faint with my exertions, and my food was exhausted.
+Whenever I stopped to rest, too, my mind dwelt upon the fearful scenes
+I had witnessed, and the fate of my friends.  I was not altogether free
+from anxiety about Clarice, either.  Brave and trustworthy as was my
+friend Manley, his party might have been pursued and overpowered by the
+savages, and my fair young sister might have been carried away into
+captivity, to suffer worse than death.  To succumb, however, would have
+been unmanly.  Although fatigued in body and anxious in mind, I had
+still sufficient physical strength to pursue my way.
+
+The day was advancing, and I determined to strike down into the plains,
+where, at all events, I could make more rapid progress than over the
+rough ground I had been traversing.  I accordingly directed my course,
+as I believed, to the eastward; but still hill beyond hill appeared, and
+it seemed as if I should never reach the more level ground.  Still up
+and on I went, until at length I gained a height from whence, looking
+down, I saw that the prairie stretched out in the far distance before
+me.
+
+I was descending at as rapid a rate as the ground would allow, when I
+caught sight, in the approaching gloom of evening, of the figure of a
+man.  The person, whoever he was, had seen me as I appeared on the top
+of a rock exposed against the sky, and was coming towards me.  To avoid
+him was impossible, so I got my weapons ready for an encounter, should
+he prove to be an enemy.  Although he must have seen I held my rifle in
+my hand, he advanced without hesitation.
+
+"What! do you not know me?" he exclaimed, when he got nearer.  "I am
+Winnemak, the friend of the Palefaces; although, alas! with but little
+power to assist them.  You, however, I can aid, for I see you are weary
+and hungry.  Come with me to where a few of my braves are encamped--but
+few, alas! the rest are killed or dispersed.  We were on our way to the
+northward, where our squaws, children, and old men are encamped, when I
+caught sight of you as you came down the mountain, and I knew at once
+that you were flying from the Arrapahas."
+
+This information explained Winnemak's unexpected appearance.  Aided by
+him, I continued the descent of the mountain, although I believe without
+his support I could have gone no farther.  He then told me all that had
+occurred.
+
+Having visited Roaring Water and warned Uncle Jeff of the attack he knew
+would be made on the farm, he returned to where he had left his
+warriors, resolved to make a diversion in our favour, as he had
+promised.  He had attacked the Arrapahas with much determination, but,
+overwhelmed by numbers, he had been driven back, with the loss of many
+of his followers.  Having in vain attempted to reach the farm, he had
+stationed a band of his best warriors to afford us support should we
+have deserted the house, or attempted afterwards to cut our way out of
+it.
+
+I was much disappointed to find that he could give me no information
+about Uncle Jeff, or about any of our friends; he was not even aware
+that Clarice had gone to join his daughter at the camp.  He expressed
+his satisfaction at hearing that she had escaped the fate which had, he
+supposed, befallen all the inmates of the farm.
+
+He now conducted me to his temporary camp, where we found a few of his
+warriors reclining on the ground.  Several of them were wounded, and all
+looked weary and disheartened.  They had, however, succeeded in killing
+a deer, and food was abundant.  I was thankful to get a substantial
+meal, after which I lay down with the rest by the side of the stream, to
+obtain the sleep I so much needed.
+
+A few skins had been stretched over some poles to afford shelter to the
+wounded, who required it more than the rest of us.
+
+I had been asleep for several hours, when, suddenly awaking, I happened
+to turn my eyes across the stream, and saw, partly concealed by the
+brushwood, the figure of an Indian stooping down and apparently watching
+us.  My first impulse was to jump up and present my rifle at him.  I
+had, indeed, made some slight movement, when I felt a hand placed upon
+my arm.  It was that of Winnemak.
+
+"Hush!" he whispered.  "I see the spy, and can kill him if I wish; but
+it is important to take him alive, to learn what he is about."
+
+I observed, as he spoke, that he was freeing himself of such parts of
+his dress as might impede his progress, and that he was gradually
+creeping nearer and nearer to the edge of the stream.  Being in the
+shade, he could not be seen by the stranger.  Presently Winnemak rose to
+his feet, and making a spring, almost cleared the stream.  With a few
+bounds he was on the opposite bank.
+
+The spy saw him coming, and finding that he was discovered, rose from
+his recumbent position.  He, too, was fleet of foot, and lightly clad.
+Away he rushed towards the level prairie; perhaps he expected to find
+friends there, or had his horse staked in that direction, near some wood
+or copse.
+
+As soon as I perceived what Winnemak was about, I too sprang up, as did
+several Indians, but as they were all worn out with fatigue they were
+soon left behind.  Being a good runner, I kept pace with the chief,
+although still at a considerable distance behind him, as he had had the
+start of me.
+
+Day was just breaking, and there being no objects to impede the rays of
+the sun as it approached the horizon, the light rapidly increased.
+Although I had, at first, lost sight of Winnemak, I soon again saw him,
+with the man he was pursuing at no great distance in front.
+
+On the two went.  Neither of them being armed, the fight was not likely
+to be a bloody one; still it was evident that Winnemak attached great
+importance to the capture of the spy.  Perhaps he suspected who he was;
+and he evidently entertained a bitter animosity against him.  I could
+not have supposed that he would have exhibited so much activity, judging
+from his appearance when clothed in his usual robes.  Although he
+appeared to be a strong, muscular man, the other Indian, from his
+movements, was evidently young and active.  How he had ventured to
+approach the camp without being armed, was a mystery.  He could not, at
+all events, have intended to injure any one, or he would have come with
+his bow and arrows.  As the light rapidly increased, and I saw him more
+clearly than at first, it struck me that he was the young brave,
+Piomingo, who had lately paid us a visit at the farm; but of this,
+seeing him at the distance he was from me, I could not be certain.
+
+The chase promised to be a far longer one than I had expected.  The
+stranger seemed as resolved to escape as Winnemak was to overtake him.
+Few people, Indians or whites, except after long training, could have
+continued running so fast and for so long a period as did the spy and
+Winnemak.
+
+I had the greatest difficulty in keeping near them; and, indeed, I had
+begun to fall behind, when I saw in front of me a broad piece of water.
+The fugitive saw it too, but had he turned either to the right or to the
+left it would have given an advantage to his pursuer; he therefore kept
+straight on.
+
+His efforts to escape were vain.  As he approached the bank the ground
+became so soft that his feet sunk deep into it at every step.  He
+discovered, too late, his mistake.  Springing back, he attempted to make
+his way to the right; but in doing so he fell.  Recovering himself,
+however, he sprang back on to the firm ground; but seeing that escape by
+flight was no longer possible, he turned round and boldly faced his
+pursuer.  At the same instant a wild swan, rising from the water, flew
+off with a loud cry.  It might have been taken for the death-wail of one
+of the combatants.  Like a couple of wild beasts, the two Indians rushed
+at each other, and the next instant they were clasped in a deadly
+embrace.  A desperate struggle ensued.  It was youth and activity
+opposed to well-knit muscles and firm nerves.
+
+Fierce was the contest.  The young man attempted to free himself from
+the grasp of his opponent; now they strove to seize each other by the
+throat; now his antagonist bore back the chief by making a desperate
+spring as his feet for a moment touched the ground; but if the older man
+allowed himself to retreat, it was only for the purpose of wearing out
+the strength of the younger, which he knew would soon be exhausted.
+
+Winnemak now seized one of his antagonist's arms, and with a movement as
+quick as thought threw him on his back across his own knee; then
+pressing him down, it appeared to me that he intended to break his
+spine.  A fearful shriek, wrung from him by the agony he was suffering,
+escaped the lips of the young brave; his eyes closed--the struggle was
+over.  Still Winnemak did not let go his victim, but gazing fiercely
+down on his countenance until all appearance of life had ceased, he
+hurled the body to the ground.  As he did so he exclaimed, "Stay there!
+You have betrayed me once; you would have stolen my daughter; you will
+no longer have the power to follow your evil practices."
+
+The combat was over as I reached the place.
+
+"Is he dead?"  I asked, as I gazed down on the face of the vanquished
+brave.
+
+"He will die," answered Winnemak; "but he still breathes."
+
+"But I thought you wished to gain information from him?"  I observed,
+feeling anxious to preserve the life of the poor wretch.
+
+"I did; but now I would rather enjoy the pleasure of seeing him die."
+
+"That is not the way we Palefaces treat a fallen enemy," I remarked.
+"You must not be displeased at what I say,--I would ask you to allow me
+to have him brought into the camp.  At all events, for the present he
+can do no further harm, and he may wish to show his gratitude to those
+who have preserved his life."
+
+"Do as you please," said the chief, after a moment's consideration.
+
+I got some water from the lake,--finding a hard place by which I could
+approach it,--and threw it over the face of the fallen man, who had, I
+perceived, merely fainted from the excruciating pain he was suffering.
+He at length opened his eyes, and seemed to recognise me.  It _was_
+Piomingo.  The chief, I noticed, stood by, watching every movement of
+his late antagonist.  I raised Piomingo's head, and was thankful to find
+that he now began to breathe more freely.
+
+"Take care," said the chief.  "He intends acting the part of the cunning
+fox, and will yet make an effort to escape."
+
+Piomingo turned his eyes towards the speaker, apparently understanding
+him.
+
+I was still making every effort to restore him, when several of
+Winnemak's followers came up.
+
+"Then you grant my request?"  I said, turning to the chief.
+
+"I will not refuse you!" he answered; "but he will not thank you for the
+mercy you wish to show him."
+
+I begged the Indians to assist me in carrying the injured man back to
+the camp, and the chief bade them do as I desired.  Obtaining some poles
+from a copse which grew near, they quickly formed a litter, upon which
+they bore him back to the spot from which we had started.  Not a groan
+escaped him, although I suspected, from the expression of his
+countenance, that he was suffering greatly.  On arriving at the camp, in
+spite of my representations the chief ordered that his legs should be
+bound together, and that one of his hands should be fastened to a tree,
+so that he would be unable to escape.
+
+Those who had remained in camp had prepared breakfast, to which even the
+wounded did ample justice.  I took some food to the prisoner, who in a
+short time was able to swallow a little.
+
+After some persuasion from me, and the promise of a reward, four of the
+Indians undertook to carry their captive to the camp of Winnemak, to
+which we were bound; it was very evident that otherwise he must have
+been left to die miserably, as he was quite unable to walk.  Three of
+the wounded men had also to be carried, so that we formed a
+mournful-looking party, as, shortly after our meal was finished, we
+commenced our march.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN.
+
+ON THE MARCH--WINNEMAK UNABLE TO GIVE ME NEWS OF MY FRIENDS--MY
+ARGUMENTS IN FAVOUR OF PIOMINGO--ENCAMPED FOR THE NIGHT--WE REACH
+WINNEMAK'S CAMP--BRAVES AND SQUAWS--WHERE ARE MY FRIENDS?--WINNEMAK AND
+HIS IDOLS--A PARTY OF BRAVES ARRIVE, WITH PRISONERS--MAYSOTTA AND HER
+DOG--A STRANGE MEETING--THE LIEUTENANT'S STORY--WE START IN QUEST OF
+CLARICE AND RACHEL--A FRUITLESS SEARCH--I LOSE MY FRIEND IN THE FOREST--
+TRYING TO REGAIN THE RIGHT PATH, I MEET WITH CLARICE AND MAYSOTTA--MY
+SISTER'S STORY--I TELL HER OF THE BURNING OF THE FARM--WE SET OUT FOR
+THE CAMP, AND MEET WITH THE LIEUTENANT--NIGHT COMING ON, WE ENCAMP IN
+THE FOREST--RESUMING OUR JOURNEY IN THE MORNING, WE REACH THE CAMP IN
+SAFETY.
+
+As we proceeded on our journey, I walked alongside the chief,
+endeavouring to gain from him all the information I could.  I was
+surprised that he had not fallen in with Uncle Jeff, and that he had
+seen nothing of Lieutenant Broadstreet and Clarice.  I supposed that he
+or his people would certainly have met them on their way to his camp--
+Winnemak could only account for it by supposing that they had made a
+detour to avoid some party of the enemy.
+
+"But might they not, then, have been surprised and overcome?"  I asked,
+with much agitation.
+
+"Not if they faced them with a bold front, or kept a proper watch at
+night," he answered.  "Those Arrapahas are cowardly; they will only
+attack their enemies when they feel secure in their numbers, or can take
+them by surprise."
+
+"They fought bravely enough when they assaulted Uncle Jeff's farm," I
+observed.  "I should not have called them cowards."
+
+"They had white men with them--and only the bravest of their warriors
+took part in the fight," he replied.
+
+I could only trust that Winnemak was right in his conjecture, and that
+we should find Clarice and her escort at the camp.  With regard to Uncle
+Jeff, I was still more anxious, and I began to fear that,
+notwithstanding his clever trick, he might not have escaped the bullets
+and arrows of his pursuers; or his horse might have fallen, and he have
+been taken prisoner.  Altogether, my state of mind may be better
+imagined than described; still, always hopeful, I continued to hope, in
+spite of the appearance of things, that they would all turn up right at
+last.
+
+I spoke to the chief on another subject.  I was not altogether satisfied
+as to the way in which he intended to treat his prisoner, and he did not
+seem at all disposed to enlighten me.  I told him how white men always
+fed their prisoners, and took good care of the wounded; and when war was
+over, set them free to return to their homes.
+
+"The ways of the Palefaces are not those of the Redskins," he answered
+evasively.  "Piomingo must be treated according to our customs; and my
+braves would complain were I to set him free to commit more mischief."
+
+I pleaded for the poor wretch that he had not done us any injury as yet;
+that though he had been watching the camp, we could not tell that he had
+any sinister object in doing so; and that, as his life had been
+preserved, it would be barbarous to take it afterwards.
+
+The chief heard me very patiently, but he was evidently unmoved by all
+my arguments.
+
+I now and then went up and spoke to the poor prisoner, who, I suspected,
+was still suffering great pain, although Indian fortitude forbade him to
+give expression to his feelings.  I urged his bearers, in the few words
+I could speak of their language, and by signs, to carry him carefully,
+for they were inclined to treat him as they would a deer or any other
+animal they might have shot.  I saw the prisoner's eyes turned towards
+me, but he in no way expressed any gratitude for the service I desired
+to render him.
+
+Winnemak was all this time keeping a look-out on every side; while
+several of his men were acting as scouts, so as to give us timely notice
+of danger.
+
+At night we encamped as before, keeping a strict watch; while the
+prisoner was bound in a way which would have rendered it difficult for
+him to escape even had he possessed strength enough to run off.  Our
+camp being pitched in a sheltered position, we lighted a fire, which
+even at that time of the year was pleasant, if not absolutely necessary;
+and there was but slight risk of its position betraying our presence to
+any passing foe.
+
+The next morning we proceeded as before; and I was thankful when at
+length, just as evening was approaching, the chief told me that we were
+not far from the camp.  I looked out eagerly ahead for the first sight
+of it, for I hoped to meet Clarice and Uncle Jeff there, and to have my
+anxiety at last set at rest.
+
+The sun was just tinging the southern side of the snowy mountains on our
+left, ere it sank below them, when I caught sight of the wigwams of the
+Kaskaskias, on the slopes of a pine-covered hill.  The camp as we drew
+near did not present a very attractive appearance.  The wigwams were
+such as are only used in summer--a few poles, covered with buffalo
+hides, or deer skins, more to afford shelter from the heat of the sun,
+or from a downfall of rain, than protection from the cold.  A number of
+squaws were seated about, some inside the tents nursing papooses, others
+tending large pots of broth boiling over fires.  A few braves were
+standing about, and others looking after the horses of the tribe, which
+they had apparently just driven in from pasture; while a pack of dogs,
+the most ill-favoured of mongrels ever seen, were squatted about,
+watching for the offal which might be thrown to them, or ready to rush
+in and seize any of the meat which might for a moment be left unguarded.
+
+The women continued at their various employments, but the braves, as we
+approached, advanced to meet us.  The chief halted and addressed them,
+but I could not follow him.  I judged, however, by the intonations of
+his voice, that he was telling them of his defeat, and the loss of so
+many of their people.  Meantime, I was looking about eagerly for signs
+of Clarice, Uncle Jeff, and Manley, but nowhere could I see any.  Still,
+I knew it would be contrary to Indian etiquette to interrupt the chief
+by inquiring for them.
+
+On hearing of the various disasters which had occurred, the men showed
+but little emotion.  The chief, I observed, now pointed to his prisoner,
+by which I feared the worst for poor Piomingo.
+
+As soon as I could venture to address the braves, I inquired for Clarice
+and the officer; and great was my dismay to find that they had not
+arrived at the camp, nor had Uncle Jeff appeared.
+
+The chief now asked for his daughter.
+
+Maysotta had gone out hunting with her favourite dog Keokuk.  There was
+no danger of any harm befalling her while she had so good an attendant,
+as Keokuk knew when a foe was within a mile or so, and would give her
+ample warning; as he would were deer, buffalo, bears, or wolves within
+the same distance.
+
+The chief, seeing my disappointment, endeavoured to console me by saying
+that perhaps my friends had missed the camp altogether, and had gone on,
+and that probably we should soon hear of them; a party of his braves
+were still out on an expedition, and they perhaps had fallen in with
+Clarice or Uncle Jeff.
+
+No news was received during the night, but, in spite of my anxiety, I
+was glad to lie down in a corner of the chiefs tent and obtain some
+rest, of which I stood greatly in need.  During our journey, when we
+might at any moment have been attacked by an enemy, I had only slept at
+intervals.
+
+I had been for some hours, I fancy, fast asleep, when I was awakened by
+a movement made by the chief, who had been lying near by me, wrapped in
+his buffalo robe.  By the light of the moon, which streamed in through
+the unclosed entrance, I saw him get up and leave the tent.
+
+Influenced by a motive for which I cannot now account, I rose and
+followed him.  My belief is that I was scarcely awake; indeed, I walked
+along like a person in a dream.  He at once left the camp, and took the
+way down to the lower and open ground.  I was at some distance behind
+him, so he did not hear my footsteps.
+
+After walking for a quarter of an hour or more, I found myself in the
+midst of an Indian burial-ground, which I recognised by the number of
+small platforms, raised on posts and thatched over, rising in all
+directions.  Besides the platforms, I observed several strange-looking
+figures fixed to the top of tall poles, and composed, as far as I could
+judge, of bits of coloured rags and skins, which fluttered in a weird
+fashion in the night breeze.
+
+The chief stopped before a couple of these fantastic-looking objects,
+and, with folded arms, gazed up at them, uttering some words which I was
+too far off to hear distinctly, though the sound of his voice reached my
+ears.  He was praying,--of that I could have no doubt,--and these
+trumpery scarecrows were his idols.  I could not have supposed that a
+man of good sense, as he appeared to be, could be the victim of a
+superstition so gross and contemptible.
+
+He continued standing for some time, making various signs, and uttering
+words as before.
+
+Unwilling to be discovered, now that I was fully awake, I was on the
+point of retreating, when the sound of my footfall reached his ears, and
+turning round he saw me.  I did not wish that he should fancy I was
+afraid of encountering him, so I at once advanced, and told him frankly
+how I came to follow him.  I assured him, also, that I had had no
+intention of acting as a spy on his movements.  As he appeared to be in
+no way displeased, I asked him, while we were walking back to the camp,
+whether he had really been worshipping the figures I had seen.
+
+"Why not?" he inquired in a serious tone.  "The times are full of danger
+and difficulty, and I wished to obtain the protection and support of the
+guardian spirits of our people.  If I did not ask them, how could I
+expect them to grant me what I want?  While I was staying at Roaring
+Water, I heard your uncle pray to your gods; and I suppose that you
+expected them to give you what you asked for."
+
+I tried to explain to him that there is but one God, the Great Spirit of
+whom his people knew, though they were sadly ignorant of his character;
+and that we never prayed to inferior beings, as our God would not allow
+us to do so.  Much more I said, though at the time with little effect;
+indeed, the chief was as deeply sunk in the grossest superstition as are
+the Indian tribes among whom the gospel light has not yet shone.
+
+On reaching his tent, he bade me lie down again, observing that he would
+talk over the matter another day.
+
+The next morning I was surprised to find that Maysotta had not returned.
+Still, her father appeared to feel no anxiety about her.
+
+The sun had been up a couple of hours or so when I heard shouts in the
+camp, and the chief with all his braves hurried out.  They went to
+welcome the return of a party of their warriors, who marched in singing
+and shouting,--the leading men having three or four scalps at the end of
+their spears, while among them were dragged three or four unfortunate
+Arrapahas, whom they had captured, and who were, according to the Indian
+custom, to be put to death.  Among them, to my surprise and horror, was
+a young squaw, who, if not beautiful according to my taste, was
+certainly interesting-looking.  She bore herself with as much fortitude,
+apparently, as the men, although she knew that her fate would be the
+same as theirs.
+
+The chief had said nothing to me about Piomingo, and I now felt
+satisfied that it was the intention of his people to sacrifice him with
+the rest of the prisoners.  I resolved, however, to plead for him, as
+well as for them, and make special endeavours to save the life of the
+young squaw.  According to the savage Indian custom, she would be
+barbarously tortured before being put to death.  It seems strange that
+human beings can take a pleasure in thus treating their
+fellow-creatures; it shows how debased, how diabolically cruel, men can
+become when they have once gone away from God.  At present, however, the
+braves were too much occupied in recounting their deeds of valour to
+think of their prisoners, who were left bound, and guarded with
+lynx-eyed watchfulness by some of the old squaws.
+
+I found that this was only one of the parties of braves, and that
+another was expected shortly with more prisoners.  As far as I could
+understand, these prisoners were said to be white men; but I concluded
+that they were some of the Mexican outlaws who had accompanied the
+Arrapahas on their marauding expedition.
+
+While looking out for them, I saw a solitary figure, rifle in hand,
+approaching the camp, whom I recognised as Maysotta, accompanied by her
+dog Keokuk.  I hastened to meet her, and told her of my anxiety at the
+non-appearance of Clarice.
+
+"If they do not come, I will go in search of them," she said.
+
+She had killed a deer, so she sent off some of her people, under the
+guidance of Keokuk, to bring it in.  Her dog would, she said, lead them
+to the spot.
+
+Shortly afterwards, the second band, who were expected, made their
+appearance in the distance, and, as before, the warriors hurried out to
+meet them.
+
+I was still talking to Maysotta, when I saw her look towards the
+approaching party, and an expression of astonishment take possession of
+her countenance.
+
+"What have our braves been doing?" she said.  "They have made a prisoner
+of our friend the young white chief."
+
+As she spoke, I looked in the same direction, and I too was greatly
+astonished, and also much alarmed, at seeing Lieutenant Broadstreet,
+with his arms tied behind him, in the midst of the warriors--his two
+troopers following, closely guarded.
+
+"What can have happened?"  I exclaimed.  "What can have become of
+Clarice and Rachel?  My dear sister! some accident must have befallen
+her."
+
+"I will learn what has happened," said Maysotta.
+
+I hurried to Winnemak, and explained that his people had made prisoners
+of those who were on their way to visit his camp.
+
+He thought I was mistaken; but I assured him that I was not, and that
+his daughter would corroborate my statement.  On hearing this he ordered
+the prisoners to be brought forward, when, at once recognising the
+lieutenant and the two troopers, he ordered them to be set at liberty.
+
+Hurrying up to my friend, I eagerly inquired for Clarice and her
+attendant.
+
+His emotion would scarcely allow him to reply.  He seemed dreadfully
+cast down, as well as weak and faint from want of food.
+
+"We had encamped two nights ago," he said, "in a secure spot, as I
+supposed, and were in hopes the next day of reaching our destination,
+when just at dusk I saw a band of Indians approaching.  To prevent them
+coming near, I ordered my men to mount and ride forward, while your
+sister and Rachel remained, as I hoped, concealed from view.  The
+Indians retreated to some distance, and I was induced to follow.  They
+then halted and made signs of friendship, which tempted me to go still
+nearer.  Suddenly, however, as I was about to inquire who they were, and
+where they were going, they set upon me and my men, without the
+slightest warning, and before we could even draw our swords or pistols
+we were dragged from our horses, and our arms bound behind us.  At first
+I thought that our captors must be Arrapahas; but looking again at their
+costume, I was sure that they were Kaskaskias, belonging to a friendly
+tribe.  In vain I expostulated, and tried to explain who we were; but
+they did not understand me, mistaking us, I believe, for some of the
+Mexicans who had accompanied the Arrapahas; at all events, we were
+dragged ignominiously along, neither food nor water being given us."
+
+I at once told the chief what the lieutenant had said.  He was very
+indignant with his people, but explained that the whole had happened by
+mistake.
+
+Our first thought, of course, was to discover Clarice and Rachel.  The
+lieutenant himself was eager to start immediately, but he was evidently
+too weak for the undertaking, and was at once led to the chief's tent,
+where Maysotta hurried to attend on him, while some of the older squaws
+took care of his two troopers.
+
+Maysotta immediately brought him food and water.  "Eat," she said; "the
+`Fair Lily' is my friend as well as yours; I am as anxious as you are to
+find her.  As soon as you are rested we will set out.  Were you to go
+now, you would faint by the way."
+
+I was standing outside the entrance to the tent while Maysotta was
+speaking to the lieutenant, and it struck me, from her looks and tone of
+voice, that she felt a warm interest in the young lieutenant, which
+might, I feared, prove inconvenient, if it had not worse consequences.
+
+I was watching the Indians, who, having lost their white prisoners, had
+now brought forward their Redskin captives, and were dancing a horrible
+war-dance round them.  Their appearance on ordinary occasions was
+somewhat savage, but they looked ten times more savage now, as they
+shrieked, and leaped, and tossed their arms and legs about, and went
+round and round, flourishing their tomahawks, and jeering at the
+unfortunate people in their midst.  The latter, knowing that they would
+not yet be sacrificed, sat in perfect silence, without exhibiting any
+emotion, and bearing patiently the insults heaped upon them.
+
+I had not abandoned my idea of pleading for the unhappy prisoners, but
+at this time I was thinking more of Clarice, and the means of recovering
+her; still, should I go away, I feared that the prisoners might be put
+to death during my absence.  Having seen that the horses of my white
+friends were turned out on a pasture close at hand, where they could get
+abundance of grass, I went to the chief and asked him whether he wished
+to be on friendly terms with the Palefaces?
+
+He said that he certainly did--it was his greatest ambition.
+
+"Then," I replied, "you must live as they do, and imitate their customs.
+I have told you before, that we do not torture or otherwise injure our
+prisoners, and that it is our duty to forgive our enemies, and to do
+them good.  Now I want you to promise me that no one shall suffer while
+I am away."
+
+The chief could not make up his mind to yield, but I urged him again and
+again, and at last I hoped, from what he said, that he would do as I
+wished.
+
+The lieutenant was now sufficiently recovered to mount his horse, and,
+followed by his two troopers, he and I set off in search of Clarice.
+None of the Indians, however, offered to accompany us, nor did Maysotta,
+as I thought she would have done; but I found that she had left the camp
+with her dog and rifle before we started.  It was her custom, I
+discovered, to act in a very independent manner on all occasions, her
+father never interfering with her.
+
+We pushed forward at as rapid a rate as we could make our horses move;
+but the ground was at first too rough to allow us to proceed as fast as
+we wished.  When we got to the plain we gave our steeds the rein.
+
+Judging from the report of Winnemak's people who last came in, we had
+not much risk of encountering any of our foes; indeed, our whole
+thoughts were entirely occupied by Clarice and Rachel.  Had they waited
+quietly the return of their escort; or had any hostile Indians
+discovered them, and carried them off as captives?  The idea of such an
+occurrence as that was too horrible to be contemplated.  Perhaps they
+might have caught and mounted their horses, and set off to try and find
+their way to the camp.  In that case we might possibly meet them, and as
+we rode along we kept a strict look-out on every side.
+
+"Can they possibly have passed us?"  I inquired of my companions.
+
+"I do not see how that can be, unless they should have gone very much
+out of their way; and I remember having pointed out to your sister the
+position of the Indian camp, so that she would know how to direct her
+course," answered Manley.  "The peculiar form of the mountains above it
+would be sufficient to guide her."
+
+After all, we felt that there was but little use in talking about the
+matter, or in surmising what might have happened--though, of course, we
+did talk on without ceasing.
+
+We at last approached the spot where Manley had left Clarice and her
+companion.  Should we not find them there, we must endeavour to follow
+their trail; and when I thought of the possibility of having to do this,
+I regretted not having endeavoured to induce an Indian to accompany us.
+
+"There is the place," said Manley, at length; "but I see no smoke, and
+had they remained they would certainly have kept up a fire."
+
+We rode forward eagerly; but our fears were realised.  The ashes of the
+fire at the camp were there, but the fire itself had long been
+extinguished.
+
+Clarice and Rachel must have left the spot some time before!
+
+We searched about in every direction, but could find no traces of their
+having been there lately, and our eyes were not sufficiently sharp to
+distinguish the signs which would have enabled an Indian to say in what
+direction they had gone.  We next looked out for their horses, but they
+were nowhere within sight.
+
+Some time was thus spent, and the day was drawing to a close.  Should we
+not find them before nightfall, we must wait until the next morning.  To
+have to do this was trying in the extreme, but we had to submit, as it
+was so dark that we could with difficulty see our way as we returned to
+the deserted camp.  My poor friend Manley was dreadfully out of spirits,
+but I assured him that he had no reason to blame himself.  He had acted
+for the best, and no man could do more.
+
+The next morning we resumed our search; but without success.  We were
+both of us in despair.
+
+"They must have taken their horses and ridden off towards the mountains;
+it is useless searching for them here any longer," I said.
+
+Manley agreed with me, and, believing that they must have gone on to the
+camp by a different route from the one we had taken, he was eager to
+return.
+
+He and his men had pushed ahead through the forest while I stopped to
+tighten the girths of my saddle; and when I rode forward, expecting
+immediately to overtake them, I found that I had followed a different
+direction from that which they had taken.
+
+It is no easy matter, in a thick forest, to regain the right path, or to
+get up with those who have once been lost sight of.  I found it to be so
+in the present instance.  I was sure that I could not be going very far
+wrong, and expected as soon as I reached the edge of the forest to see
+my friends, although they might have got some little way ahead on the
+open ground.
+
+As I was riding on, I fancied that I heard the bark of a dog.  I
+listened, and again heard the same sound.  I was now certain that the
+animal was not far off.  To whom could it belong?  The dog was not
+likely to be wandering by itself in the forest.  I rode in the direction
+from whence the sound proceeded, and in a short time reached a somewhat
+more open part of the forest.  Great was my surprise and joy to see my
+dear little sister Clarice, leaning on the arm of Maysotta, who carried
+her rifle in her hand, while Keokuk ran beside her.
+
+Leaping from my horse, I sprang towards Clarice, who threw her arms
+round my neck, exclaiming, "O Ralph, I am so thankful to see you!  I
+have been in a dreadful state of alarm and anxiety, thinking that
+Manley--I mean Lieutenant Broadstreet--and his men had been killed.
+Maysotta has somewhat relieved my mind.  But where is he?  Has he been
+unable to come and look for me?"
+
+The assurance I gave that Manley was well, and not far off, soon
+restored Clarice to her usual composure.
+
+Having no longer any fears about Manley's safety, she was able to answer
+the questions I put to her.  After telling me how the lieutenant and his
+men had ridden off to meet the Indians, she continued:--
+
+"We were sitting before the fire awaiting their return, when what was
+our dismay to see two huge wolves approaching the camp, followed by a
+number of cubs!  Our first impulse was to fly; and while the wolves
+stopped to eat up our provisions, we were able to escape to a distance.
+We took refuge in the hollow of a tree, which afforded us sufficient
+shelter, and the aperture being some way up, we felt sure the wolves
+could not make their way in.  But Maysotta has been telling me that
+something dreadful has happened, though I cannot make out what she
+means."
+
+"I will tell you all about that by-and-by," I answered; "but I am eager
+to know how Maysotta managed to find you."
+
+"As soon as we thought that the wolves had gone from our camp, Rachel
+went to see if anything had been left; but the savage creatures had
+carried off everything, and at the same time frightened away our horses
+and mules, and they were nowhere to be seen.  We remained in the tree
+for some time, and I do not think anybody would have found us.  Then
+Rachel went away to try and get some berries and roots.  She had not
+been long absent when I heard a dog barking, and looking out through a
+small hole in the hollow trunk, I saw Maysotta approaching.  I therefore
+stepped out of my place of concealment; and Maysotta, who was delighted
+to find me, said that she had come out expressly to search for us, and
+would take us immediately to the camp.  Of course, I could not go
+without Rachel, and we are now on our way to look for her, as she cannot
+be far off."
+
+"Keokuk will find her," said Maysotta, patting her dog on the head, and
+saying a few words to him.
+
+Away he started, and in a short time we heard him barking loudly.
+Maysotta, leaving Clarice with me, hurried on, and in a few minutes we
+saw her approach, guiding Rachel towards us.
+
+Rachel's joy on seeing me was so demonstrative, that I scarcely liked to
+tell her or my sister of the destruction of the farm.  However, it had
+to be done, and I related all that had taken place.  As I proceeded,
+Rachel gave full vent to her grief, whilst my sister betrayed the sorrow
+she felt by her tearful and troubled countenance.  Rachel wrung her
+hands and burst into tears, which her own previous perilous position had
+not been able to draw from her.
+
+"De farm burned!" she exclaimed; "oh dear! oh dear!  And what become of
+Jenny, Nancy, Polly, and all de oder cows, and de pigs and de poultry?
+And Uncle Jeff, what he do; and Bartle and Gideon?"
+
+I consoled her somewhat by saying that I thought it possible all three
+had escaped, and that even the cows and pigs might have got away, either
+into the woods or among the hills.
+
+On hearing this she became somewhat more tranquil, and was able to chat
+away in her usual style.
+
+We now prepared to set out for the camp.  I thought it probable, on
+account of the delay, that we might not overtake Manley, although I
+specially wished to do so, in order to put an end to his anxiety.  It
+was, of course, important to recover the horses and baggage-mules, and
+Maysotta proposed that she should conduct us to the edge of the forest,
+where we could remain while she, with Keokuk, searched for the
+animals,--expressing, at the same time, her confidence of success.
+
+Having placed Clarice on my horse, I led the animal by the rein till we
+reached the spot proposed.  We looked out to the westward for Manley and
+his troopers, and were greatly disappointed at not seeing them.  So, I
+suspect, was Clarice.  We had not, however, waited long until I caught
+sight of three horsemen.  They came rapidly on, and to my great
+satisfaction I distinguished our friends.  On observing us they put
+spurs to their horses, and the lieutenant galloped forward.
+
+Clarice met him with a sweet smile.
+
+"I felt very sure that you had not willingly deserted us," she answered,
+when, in an agitated voice, Manley told her of the anguish of his mind
+at finding himself a prisoner in the hands of the Indians, leaving her
+unprotected in the forest.
+
+As we could not tell how long Maysotta might be absent, we lighted a
+fire and cooked some provisions, of which both Clarice and Rachel stood
+greatly in need.  The Indian damsel, however, had been so confident
+about finding the horses, that I was not surprised to see Keokuk driving
+them towards us, a short time before sunset.
+
+Maysotta expressed her satisfaction at finding the young white chief, as
+she called Manley, and his men with us.  "As it is now too late to set
+off to-night," she said, "we must remain here.  There are water and
+grass near at hand; and if your men will do as I direct them, we will
+quickly put up a wigwam for Clarice, the black woman, and me."
+
+Manley and I offered to act under her directions; but, except that we
+cut some rough sticks, and transported some bark, she really gave us
+very little to do,--performing nearly the whole of the architectural
+operations with her own hands.
+
+I was thankful that Clarice would thus have shelter, and be able to
+obtain the rest which she so much required.
+
+Maysotta had shot several small animals, and these, with the provisions
+we had brought, afforded us an abundant supper.
+
+The night was passed without any interruption, and early the next
+morning we set off for Winnemak's camp.  I offered to take Maysotta on
+my horse, but she declined, saying that she would proceed on foot, as
+she hoped to shoot some deer by the way.
+
+We rode as fast as we could; indeed, I was most anxious to get back,
+both on account of the unhappy captives, and because I hoped to hear
+news of Uncle Jeff.
+
+As we got into the neighbourhood of the camp, we caught sight, on the
+summit of a slight elevation, of a single horseman, who sat his steed
+without moving, apparently unable to make out who we were, as, lifting
+his hand to his brow, he peered at us from under it.  We had got within
+speaking distance before I recognised our host Winnemak.  His whole
+appearance and bearing were totally changed.  With a magnificent crown
+of feathers on his head, a jacket of rich fur handsomely trimmed,
+glittering bracelets and earrings, a spear in his hand and a shield at
+his back, as he firmly sat his strongly-built mustang, he looked every
+inch a warrior chief.
+
+"I did not know you at first, but I do now," he said, smiling; "and the
+White Lily is truly welcome to my tents."
+
+Clarice thanked him, and we rode to the camp together.  He told us that
+he purposed visiting the chiefs of all the neighbouring tribes and
+forming a confederation, in order to resist effectually any future
+invasion of our common enemies the Arrapahas.  "For such a purpose a
+chief must be habited as becomes a chief," he added, to account to us
+for the change in his costume.
+
+I scarcely listened to him, however, as I was eagerly waiting to inquire
+if Uncle Jeff had arrived at the camp; and I was much disappointed to
+find that nothing had been seen or heard of him.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT.
+
+I SEEK OUT PIOMINGO--A STRONG DESIRE TO SAVE HIS LIFE--I PLEAD WITH THE
+CHIEF, AND GAIN MY POINT--I OFFER THE YOUNG BRAVE MY HORSE AND ARMS--
+KINDNESS REQUITED--THE INDIAN'S ESCAPE--A DARING ACT, AND A KIND DEED--
+WE SEEK PROTECTION FROM THE INDIANS--RETURN OF UNCLE JEFF AND MAYSOTTA--
+AN ADDRESS TO THE BRAVES--HOW IT SUCCEEDED--UNCLE JEFF'S STORY--THE
+LIEUTENANT ABOUT TO LEAVE US--HIS PLANS--WE SEND OUT SCOUTS--ALARMING
+INTELLIGENCE--THE CAMP STRUCK--WE MOVE TO THE NORTHWARD--WE CHANGE OUR
+PLANS--A WONDERFUL REGION--WE SEPARATE FROM OUR INDIAN FRIENDS--THROUGH
+A PINE FOREST--THE CATARACT OF THE PASS--WE SEND BACK OUR HORSES--OUR
+JOURNEY CONTINUED--A "CANADA STAG" KILLED--ENCAMPED FOR THE NIGHT.
+
+The chief, who seemed inclined to treat us with every kindness,
+immediately ordered a wigwam to be put up for Clarice and Rachel, and
+another for Manley and me.
+
+In the meantime, feeling interested in the fate of Piomingo, I went to
+seek him out.  I found him lying on the ground, under the shade of some
+trees, to one of which he was secured by ropes.  I asked him if he
+desired to escape.
+
+"Yes," he replied; "life is sweet.  But I am prepared to die as becomes
+a brave, if my enemies are resolved to take my life."
+
+"If you were free, what would you do?"  I asked.
+
+"I would endeavour to rescue the young squaw who was brought in a
+prisoner two days ago; she is the maiden I was about to make my wife.
+Life without her would be of little value to me; were she to be put to
+death, I should be ready to die with her."
+
+"But are you able to move?"  I asked.
+
+"The pain has left my back, and I am as strong as ever," he answered.
+"Give me the opportunity, and you will see how I shall act."
+
+Feeling a strong desire to save the lives of these two young people at
+every risk, I immediately went back to the chief, and used every
+argument in my power to induce him to set Piomingo at liberty.  I
+pointed out to him how it was far more noble to forgive an injury than
+to avenge it, and that if he allowed Piomingo to go free he would make
+him his friend for life.
+
+"If you choose to set him at liberty, you are welcome to do so," he said
+at last; "but he is unable to move, and if he remains in this camp he
+will be killed."
+
+"I will see to that, and assist him to get away," I answered.
+
+I hurried back to where Piomingo lay, and at once undid the cords which
+bound him.
+
+"I feel that my strength has returned, and that I shall be able to
+perform whatever I undertake," he said.
+
+"I do not wish to do things by halves," I remarked.  "You shall have my
+horse; I will place the animal in yonder wood.  If you have an
+opportunity, you can return him; but if not, I will give him to you."
+
+"Young Paleface," he said, struck by my kindness, "Piomingo would wish
+to serve you for the remainder of his days; perhaps he will have an
+opportunity of showing his gratitude; but he would ask you to show him
+your generosity still further.  Supply him with arms; without them, he
+may fall a victim to the first foe he meets."
+
+"I will give you my knife and sword, but you must promise me not to use
+them against any of the people of this tribe except in self-defence,
+should they attempt to recapture you."
+
+Piomingo swore by the Great Spirit that he would act as I desired.
+
+"I will leave the sword and knife close to the tree to which I will
+secure my horse," I said on leaving him.
+
+I thought it better not to question him as to his intentions in regard
+to the young squaw, although I had my suspicions on the subject.
+
+I forthwith went for my horse, which I led to the wood, as I had
+promised.  All the Indians were so much engaged that they took no notice
+of my proceedings; and when every arrangement had been made, I returned
+to Piomingo.
+
+Grasping my hand, he exclaimed,--"You are more generous than I deserve;
+for when I went to your farm it was with the intention of working you
+evil.  But after I saw the `Fair Lily,' your sister, I had not the heart
+to do her an injury; and instead of remaining and opening the gate to
+your enemies, as I had intended, I made my escape.  When I was watching
+your camp, it was with no treacherous design.  I wished to warn you that
+the Arrapahas were still advancing, and that their purpose was to occupy
+the passes through the mountains, so that they could intercept you and
+any other Palefaces who might travel in that direction.  They must, by
+this time, have carried out that part of their plan, so that I would
+advise you and your friends to pass on more to the north, by which means
+you may escape them.  I have also to tell you that one of your people is
+in their hands.  They have been carrying him about with them from place
+to place; but whether they intend to kill him, as they have done the
+other prisoners, I could not learn."
+
+I thanked Piomingo for his information, which, I felt sure, gratitude
+had prompted him to give.  And, of course, I resolved to urge the chief
+to act upon it.
+
+On questioning Piomingo, I was convinced, from the description he gave
+of the white man who had been made prisoner, that it must be either
+Gideon or Bartle.  I had great hopes, at all events, that Uncle Jeff had
+escaped from his pursuers; but what had since become of him I could not
+conjecture, nor could Piomingo give me any information.
+
+It was now sufficiently dark to allow of the captive making his escape
+without being observed.  I again cast off the ropes, therefore, and
+stole quietly away from the spot.  The moment I had gone, he must have
+crept away--crouching down, Indian fashion, until he had got to a safe
+distance from the camp, when, having first secured the weapons I had
+left for him, he must have mounted my horse and galloped off.
+
+The next day had been fixed for the death of the prisoners, so I boldly
+told the chief that, taking advantage of his permission, I had set
+Piomingo at liberty, and urged him to be equally generous towards the
+young squaw.
+
+"My people will complain if they are disappointed," he answered, turning
+aside.
+
+I was sorry that I could not see Maysotta, as she might have effectually
+pleaded for one of her own sex.
+
+Stakes had now been driven into the ground, and every preparation made
+for the horrible sacrifice.  But, looking at the captives, I should not
+have supposed that they were to be the victims.  Even the young squaw
+retained her composure.
+
+I spoke to Manley on the subject.  "We must not allow these savages to
+carry out their cruel intention," I said.  "If you and your men will
+assist, we might set them free."
+
+"I would gladly do as you propose," he answered, "but it would be at the
+sacrifice, probably, of our own lives and that of your sister.  These
+Redskins now treat us with every respect; but were we to interfere with
+their customs, they would naturally turn upon us."
+
+I felt that he was right in that respect; but still I could not bear the
+thought of allowing the horrible deed to be perpetrated, without again
+interceding for the victims.
+
+The hour now approached for the death of the prisoners, and finding that
+Piomingo had escaped, the Redskins were the more eager to put to death
+those who remained in their power.  They were therefore led out and
+bound to the stakes, and the savages commenced their horrible war-dance
+round them.
+
+Manley and I again pleaded with the chief.
+
+"It is useless," answered Winnemak; "I have said it, and it must be
+done."
+
+Just then, from behind the shelter of a wood on one side of the
+mountains, a mounted warrior dashed out.  I saw at once that it was
+Piomingo.  His eyes were fixed on one point; it was the spot where the
+young squaw was bound.  Quick as lightning he cut the cords which bound
+her, and placing her before him on the saddle, galloped off, and was out
+of reach before those at hand could hinder him.  Fortunately, none of
+Winnemak's people had firearms, and their bows and arrows having been
+laid aside, they hurried to their wigwams to obtain them.  But ere bow
+could be drawn the rescued squaw and her deliverer were far beyond their
+reach.  In vain were showers of arrows sent after them; the fugitives
+heeded them not.  Many of the braves ran for their horses; but I well
+knew that my gallant steed, even with two people on his back, could keep
+ahead of them.
+
+The whole camp was soon in confusion and astonishment at the audacity of
+the act.  Some of the braves may have suspected that I had had a hand in
+the business, for I observed that they cast angry glances at me as they
+passed.  So great was their excitement, too, that for the moment they
+had forgotten the other prisoners.
+
+Just then I met Sergeant Custis and Pat Sperry.
+
+"Now is our time to do a kind deed," I said; "it may be at some risk,
+but let us set the other prisoners free."
+
+"Sure, won't I, thin!" cried Pat.
+
+"I will venture on it," said the sergeant.
+
+We hurried to the spot, and, in spite of the expostulations of a few old
+squaws who had remained to watch them, we cut the ropes which bound the
+unhappy captives to the stakes.
+
+"Now run for your lives!"  I exclaimed.
+
+The released prisoners did not require a second bidding, although the
+old squaws tried to stop them.  They were all young and active men, too,
+and before any of the braves had returned from their futile chase after
+Piomingo, the fugitives had got to a considerable distance from the
+camp.
+
+As I knew that our part in the affair must at once become known, I
+immediately hastened to the chief.
+
+"I have saved you from committing a great crime, which would have made
+you despised and hated by all white men," I exclaimed, with a boldness
+at which I myself was surprised.  "If my uncle were here he would speak
+as I do, and approve of my conduct."
+
+The chief appeared to be dumbfounded at my audacity; but, although he
+himself would not have interfered, I do not think he was really sorry
+that the prisoners had escaped.
+
+"I must get you to protect us from your people when they return," I
+said.  "We have no wish to take the places of the prisoners, or to have
+bloodshed in the matter.  At the same time, we are resolved to fight for
+our lives, should your people attempt to molest us."
+
+"You indeed speak boldly," said the chief.  "But I will endeavour to
+prevent further mischief, and will tell my people all you have said."
+
+Almost immediately afterwards the braves came hurrying back to the camp,
+when the old squaws commenced in screeching tones to tell them what had
+occurred.  The warriors on this advanced towards us with threatening
+looks.  The chief stepped forward, and holding up his hands, they at
+once stopped and prepared to listen to him.  He possibly may have made a
+very eloquent speech in our favour, but his braves were evidently not
+satisfied.  We saw them making violent gestures, and, from the words
+which reached us, I made out that they insisted on our being delivered
+up to suffer in the place of the prisoners we had liberated.
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet, who had now joined us, rifle in hand, told me to
+say to the chief that if his people were injured an army of white men
+would be sent by his Government against them, and not one would be
+allowed to escape.
+
+Although, I believe, the chief spoke as I begged him, the angry braves
+were not to be appeased, still crying out that we must be handed over to
+them.
+
+"Not while we have got a cartridge left in our pouches," cried Sergeant
+Custis, lifting his rifle as he spoke, as if he intended to make use of
+it, while Manley, Pat, and I followed his example.
+
+Just at this juncture two persons were seen approaching the camp,--the
+one was Maysotta, accompanied by Keokuk, the other was a tall person
+dressed in skins.  At first I did not recognise him; but on looking
+again, what was my joy to see Uncle Jeff!  Both he and Maysotta must
+have observed that something unusual was taking place in the camp, for
+they hurried forward at a quick pace, and in another moment had
+approached the chief.
+
+Uncle Jeff at once put out his hand.  "What does all this mean?" he
+asked.
+
+Winnemak was silent.
+
+"I will tell you all about it, Uncle Jeff," I said; and I briefly
+related what had occurred.
+
+"You acted rightly, Ralph," he answered.  "It would never do for white
+men to stand by and see murder committed, which proper boldness could
+prevent.  Hand me a few cartridges, for I have expended my ammunition;
+and although we are five to fifty, I feel very sure these fellows will
+not interfere with us.  However, we will try fair means first; and the
+young squaw will, I am sure, be on our side."
+
+He at once turned to Maysotta, and telling her what had occurred, begged
+her to plead with her father and his people.  She did not seem to think
+it necessary to say anything to Winnemak, but at once addressed herself
+to the braves, over whom it was evident she had great influence.
+
+I saw the angry expression gradually disappear from their countenances;
+their gestures became less menacing, and at length their fury completely
+subsided.  Maysotta saw the advantage she had gained, and went on to
+tell them that we were their guests, and that, even had we been guilty
+of a greater provocation, they were bound to protect our lives with
+their own; that we had always been friendly with the red men; and, above
+all, that we had preserved the life of their chief, who, had it not been
+for us, would have died.  She by this means completely won over the
+braves, but she had a harder task with the old squaws.  Finally,
+however, she succeeded with them, and what appeared at one time to
+threaten a serious termination was at length settled to the satisfaction
+of all parties.
+
+We promised, as soon as we could obtain them, presents of tobacco,
+blankets, and beads for the squaws, and some arms and ammunition for the
+braves, on condition that they would always use them in our service.
+
+We were, of course, very eager to hear how Uncle Jeff had escaped.  I
+noticed, besides, that he looked fatigued and careworn, and had
+evidently suffered much.
+
+"I had a narrow escape from my pursuers, on leaving the farm," he said,
+"for more than one bullet whistled close to my ears, while two entered
+the sides of my brave Jack--who bore me, notwithstanding, for many a
+mile, until I had left my enemies far behind.  Then my gallant steed
+sank down and died.  As I was making my way northward on foot, I caught
+sight of several parties of Arrapahas.  This made me feel very anxious
+on account of Clarice and her escort, who, I feared, might have fallen
+into their hands.  I myself had some difficulty in avoiding them, and at
+length I found it necessary to take to the mountains, where, at the same
+time, I should have a better chance of killing game.  Unfortunately, for
+the first time in my life I became very ill, and had to remain for
+several days in a cave, hardly able to crawl out and get a draught of
+water from a spring hard by.  Recovering, I moved on again; but having
+exhausted the few cartridges I possessed, I was reduced to hard straits
+for food.
+
+"I was making my way on when I heard a shot fired; and as I approached
+the spot, I saw a young Indian girl who had just killed a small deer.
+Her quick eye caught sight of me at the same moment.  I made signs to
+her that I was desperately hungry, and she in turn pointed to the deer;
+so, as she appeared in no way alarmed at seeing me, I at once went up to
+her.  After exchanging a few words, it occurred to me that she must be
+the daughter of our friend Winnemak; and on my asking her, she said that
+such was the case.  I then informed her who I was; upon which she
+immediately cut up the deer, lighted a fire, and prepared such a meal as
+I had not enjoyed for many a day.  I soon felt my strength wonderfully
+restored, and my spirits rose when she told me that Clarice and you were
+safe.  We accordingly at once set off for the camp, and I am thankful
+that we arrived in time to settle matters amicably with our friends
+here."
+
+The arrival of Uncle Jeff produced a great improvement in the state of
+affairs.  The Indians had all heard of him, and Winnemak treated him
+with the greatest respect.  Uncle Jeff was indeed likely to exercise a
+beneficial influence over the tribe.  He told them that although men had
+a right to defend themselves against their enemies, the Great Spirit
+disliked their making war one upon another; that he wished them all to
+live at peace with their fellow-creatures; to provide proper food,
+clothing, and shelter for their squaws and papooses; and that the Great
+Spirit intended that they should cultivate the ground, and not depend
+upon the precarious supply which the chase afforded.  Uncle Jeff told
+them also that the Great Spirit loved them all, and wished them to be
+his children; that they were very wicked, but that he was ready to
+forgive them, and had sent One on earth, his own dear Son, who had
+consented to be punished instead of them, that he might become their
+Elder Brother, and that they might enjoy the affection and privileges
+bestowed by the Father upon his children.
+
+Uncle Jeff was not much of a preacher, but, as he said, he might manage
+to break ground, so that any missionary coming after him would be more
+likely to be well received.
+
+Clarice did not fail to talk to Maysotta on the same subject; and the
+Indian girl appeared to take in the truths of the gospel much more
+readily than did the men of her tribe.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Although the camp was pitched in a tolerably secure position, both Uncle
+Jeff and Winnemak considered it necessary to send out scouts in order to
+ascertain what the enemy were about.
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet, who had no longer any excuse for remaining with
+us, felt that it was his duty to proceed, with the two troopers, on his
+journey.  But he was evidently very unwilling to leave Clarice; and I
+suspect that she also had no wish to let him go.
+
+"I cannot tell to what dangers you may be exposed, and I shall be in a
+miserable state of anxiety until I once more have the happiness of
+seeing you," he said to her.  "My intention is to point out the state of
+affairs to the commandant at Fort Harwood, and induce him to obtain such
+a body of troops as will effectually overawe the savages and drive them
+back to the southward, so that your uncle and other settlers may be able
+to resume possession of their property, and for the future live in
+peace.  The sooner, therefore, I set out, the more quickly will this
+desirable object be attained."
+
+"I highly applaud your intention, lieutenant," said Uncle Jeff; "and I
+speak honestly when I say that, if you wish at any time to turn your
+sword into a ploughshare, as the saying is, I shall be happy to have you
+for a neighbour; and come when you may, you shall always be welcome at
+Roaring Water.  I hope that it will not be long before I am back there
+again.  I only wish I knew what has become of Bartle and Gideon; if they
+are alive, we shall very soon get the farm built up again, and
+everything put to rights."
+
+The first of the scouts who had been sent out soon came back, with the
+information that the enemy were still in considerable numbers in the
+neighbourhood.  Winnemak and Uncle Jeff agreed, therefore, that it would
+be prudent to move further to the north, in consequence of what Piomingo
+had told me.  Camp was accordingly struck, and the baggage animals--
+which, I am sorry to say, for the sake of my Redskin friends, included a
+number of the squaws--were loaded.  A small party of warriors going
+ahead acted as an advance-guard, while the remainder of the tribe
+brought up the rear, or went as scouts on either hand.
+
+As the lieutenant had to follow the same road for some distance, we
+continued together,--he, as may be supposed, riding alongside of
+Clarice.  I do not know what Uncle Jeff thought about the matter, but it
+was evident to me that Clarice and Manley were very fond of one another.
+However, as I thought highly of him, I did not feel myself called upon
+to interfere in the matter.
+
+We had proceeded some distance, when another of the scouts came in with
+the alarming intelligence that the enemy, in considerable numbers, were
+ahead of us, and that it was too probable they intended to attack us on
+our march.  We had therefore to proceed with greater caution than
+before; and the advance-guard was considerably strengthened, so that
+they might be able to keep an enemy in check until the remainder of the
+tribe could come up.
+
+It was too evident that the Arrapahas had overrun the country, and that
+it would be some time before they could be expelled; and, such being the
+case, Uncle Jeff said he would fix upon another location, perhaps to the
+west of the Rocky Mountains, where the Indians were friendly, and where
+he would still be near enough to the high-road to obtain a market for
+his produce.
+
+He had, consequently, just settled to accompany the lieutenant through
+the pass, when another scout came in with the information that the
+Arrapahas had taken possession of the pass itself, and that they had so
+fortified themselves that they could not be driven out except by a
+strong party, and at considerable loss of life.
+
+This made it necessary for Uncle Jeff and Manley to change their plans.
+They settled that we should proceed northwards with the Indians, while
+they reconnoitred the pass; promising, should they find the account they
+had received to be correct, to rejoin us, and perhaps attempt to cross
+the mountains so as to reach the western plains.  The mountains to the
+northwards, however, were but little known, and even Winnemak confessed
+that he had never wandered among them.  He had heard, he said, that
+there was a wonderful region in that direction, where the earth trembled
+frequently; the fountains, instead of being cold, were hot, and that the
+water was seen rushing upwards in huge jets; and that there were lakes
+amid the mountains, and torrents, and waterfalls such as were nowhere
+else to be seen.
+
+"If the chiefs account is correct, it must be an interesting region to
+visit," said Sergeant Custis.  "For my own part, I hope we shall have
+the chance of getting there."
+
+While travelling on we kept in compact order, looking out, as usual, for
+the approach of foes; but happily none appeared.  Crossing the road
+which led to the pass, we continued onwards until nightfall.  We then
+encamped in as strong a position as we could find.  We knew it was of no
+use to attempt concealing the route we had followed; for even had we
+taken the greatest pains to do so, we should not have succeeded in
+eluding the sharp eyes of our foes, had they wished to pursue us.
+
+Soon after it grew dark, the sounds of horses' feet were heard.  The
+braves flew to arms.  We stood ready with our rifles.  Before we could
+see any one, Uncle Jeff's voice was heard, and he and Manley rode into
+camp.  They had found that the report of the scouts was correct, and
+that we could not hope to be able to get through in that direction.
+Accordingly, the next morning we again started, and pushed on until we
+reached a spot strongly guarded by rocks and trees, with a stream
+flowing on one side.  Here Winnemak, believing himself secure from his
+foes, resolved to remain.
+
+We now made preparations to separate from our Indian friends.  None of
+them were willing to encounter the fatigue and dangers necessary to be
+undergone in crossing the mountains; they also evidently believed the
+region to be enchanted, and, if inhabited at all, to be the abode of
+spirits, or beings differing greatly from the human race.  When Maysotta
+heard we were going, she begged Clarice and Rachel to remain with her;
+but Clarice had made up her mind to accompany us, and was fully prepared
+for all the difficulties we might have to encounter.  Fortunately,
+Lieutenant Broadstreet had sufficient supplies of provisions for all our
+wants.  We were thus not altogether destitute of the necessaries of
+life, for we had, I remember, even tea and coffee, sugar and salt.  The
+lieutenant had also a very small bell-tent, the canvas of which formed
+scarcely half a load for a man.  He himself seldom used it, but he
+insisted that it should be brought, to afford shelter to Clarice.  Three
+or four Indians, moreover, agreed to accompany us as far as our
+baggage-mules could go, that they might convey our provisions and
+stores; after which we should have to carry them ourselves in knapsacks
+on our backs.
+
+On parting with Winnemak, he told us that we should come back sooner
+than we expected, as he was sure we should never get over the mountains.
+
+"`Where there's a will there's a way.'  There is nothing like having the
+will to do a thing, to help one to succeed," answered Uncle Jeff.
+
+Our guides were under the belief that the only practicable way in which
+they could get to the region they had heard of, was by following up a
+torrent which, they said, came down from the far-off snowy summits of
+the mountains in a succession of cataracts.  For some distance we
+travelled through a dense pine forest, following the course of a stream
+into which we concluded the torrent fell.  We frequently had to turn
+aside to avoid the numberless fallen trunks, or to dismount and lead our
+animals over them.  We thus made but slow progress, and were compelled
+to encamp in the midst of the forest at a much earlier hour than would
+have been necessary in the open country.  We kept up a blazing fire,
+however, and happily escaped a visit from bears, or any of the savage
+animals whose voices we heard round us on every side.
+
+The next morning we moved forward, and looked out eagerly for a torrent.
+At length we heard the roar of tumbling waters, and making our way
+through the forest we came in sight of a cataract which altogether
+surpassed that of our own location.  It appeared to be formed of several
+streams, which, rushing forth from the snowy heights, joined the main
+body, and then came leaping downwards in one vast mass of water, with a
+strength sufficient, it would seem, to force its way through the hardest
+rock.  There could be no doubt that this was the very cataract we were
+in search of.
+
+To carry our animals farther, would be impossible; indeed, had they been
+able to make their way, they would not have found sufficient grass for
+their sustenance in the rocky region we were approaching.  We
+accordingly encamped on a level spot not far from the cataract.  When I
+surveyed the wild and difficult region which we had to pass, I regretted
+that Clarice had accompanied us, and wished that she had remained with
+the Indians.  Besides the fatigue which we must undergo, I feared that
+we might run short of provisions, and that my sister might be exposed to
+other hardships, which she was little able to endure.
+
+She laughed at my fears.
+
+"You do not know how strong I am; I shall be able to go through as much
+as any of you," she said.  "Although I like Maysotta, I should not have
+been happy among her savage tribe."
+
+The next morning we sent the animals back, and loaded ourselves with
+packs of provisions.  Rachel carried as much as any one of us, and
+Clarice insisted on having a load likewise--although Manley, who made it
+up, took good care that it should be a very light one.
+
+The first day's journey was not so fatiguing as we expected to find it,
+for we managed to wend our way upward on the slopes of the hills,
+avoiding the more broken and steep places.  We were soon satisfied, too,
+that there was no risk of running short of food, for several times we
+came upon herds of deer; although, as we approached them without care,
+they scampered off before we were near enough to get a shot.
+
+We had made our way through another pine forest, and had just turned an
+angle in the mountains, when suddenly before us we saw several wapiti,
+commonly known as the "Canada stag," one of the largest of the deer
+tribe.  This animal is fully as large as the biggest ox I ever saw; his
+horns, branching in serpentine curves, being upwards of six feet from
+tip to tip.  In colour he is reddish-brown; on the upper part of the
+neck the hairs are mixed with red and black, while from the shoulders
+and along the sides the hide is a kind of grey.
+
+The stags stopped and gazed at us stupidly, without taking to flight,
+then began to utter cries which sounded wonderfully like the braying of
+an ass; upon which Uncle Jeff lifted his unerring rifle and brought one
+of them down, when the rest, taking fright, scampered off.
+
+He and the two soldiers immediately began cutting up the animal.
+
+"I wish we could take the hide with us, for it makes the best leather
+anywhere to be found," Uncle Jeff observed; "but we must not add to our
+loads."
+
+As the day was now drawing to a close, we had not far to carry the meat
+we had just obtained; and coming to a spot near one of the numerous
+streams which fed the "big cataract," we encamped.  As before, the small
+bell-tent, which Pat Sperry had carried, was erected for Clarice and
+Rachel; while we made our beds of fir-tops, round our camp-fire, with
+such shelter as our blankets and a few boughs afforded.  We were too
+well accustomed to this sort of life, however, to consider it any
+hardship.
+
+We had no longer any fear of being attacked by Indians, but it was still
+necessary to keep a watch by night, for it was very possible that a
+grizzly might take it into his head to pay us a visit, or a pack of
+wolves find us out; or a prowling panther might pounce down upon us,
+should the fire go out, and no one be on the alert to drive him off.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE.
+
+WE CONTINUE OUR JOURNEY OVER THE MOUNTAINS, AND ENCAMP IN A FERTILE
+VALLEY--HUNT ELK IN COMPANY WITH A PANTHER--I SPOIL THE SPORT OF THE
+LATTER--UNCLE JEFF WOUNDS AN ELK, WHICH IS LOST DOWN A PRECIPICE--MORE
+FORTUNATE AFTERWARDS--UNCLE JEFF RESOLVES TO REMAIN WITH CLARICE,
+RACHEL, AND PAT, WHILE MANLEY, THE SERGEANT, AND I PUSH ON--DIFFICULTIES
+IN CROSSING THE MOUNTAINS--MANLEY IN FEARFUL DANGER--HE ESCAPES--DESCEND
+TOWARDS A BROAD VALLEY--ITS WONDERFUL APPEARANCE--WE ENCAMP--THE
+SERGEANT NEARLY SCALDS HIS FINGERS IN A TEMPTING SPRING--CURIOUS
+PHENOMENON--DREADFUL NOISES OF WILD BEASTS DISTURB OUR SLUMBERS.
+
+The next day, at an early hour, we were again on the move, Clarice and
+Rachel trudging on bravely with the help of long thin poles, the points
+hardened in the fire.  Onwards and upwards we went, sometimes passing
+through dense forests, and climbing over the trunks of fallen trees; at
+others making our way through glades, where, sheltered from the sun, the
+walking was comparatively easy.  On emerging into the more open ground,
+we searched for some canon or cleft in the mountains through which we
+might find a passage.  As for going over the summits of the mountains,
+that was evidently impossible.  They consisted of jagged pinnacles, or
+precipitous rocks covered with snow; and even the most experienced
+mountaineers, supplied with ropes and all other appliances, could not
+hope to surmount them.
+
+At length, after traversing for some distance the mountain-side, we saw
+before us a deep gorge, at the bottom of which rushed a torrent towards
+the east.
+
+"If we can find holding ground for our feet, we may get through there,"
+said Manley.
+
+Uncle Jeff agreed with him, so we made towards it.  For ourselves we had
+no fears, but we naturally felt very anxious for Clarice, who must
+suffer from fatigue with such rough and dangerous climbing as lay before
+us; although, in reality, with her correct eye and active feet, she was
+as secure on the giddy heights and snowy ledges over which we passed as
+any one of us.
+
+Poor Rachel felt the cold greatly, and was less able to get along than
+her young mistress.  Still she persevered.  "If you go I go, Missee
+Clarice; never mind where," said the faithful creature; although very
+often she crept along on her hands and knees rather than trust herself
+to an upright position.
+
+Thus, climbing along the side of the precipice, with a gorge so deep on
+one side that the bottom was invisible, and the mountain rising on the
+other apparently lost in the skies, we worked our way on until, after
+descending again for some distance, we reached more level ground.  It
+was a large valley or plateau surrounded by mountains; those we had
+crossed being on the one side, while a still more elevated range
+occupied the other.  Wild as was the scenery through which we had
+passed, this was wilder still.  It was traversed, however, by the stream
+whose course we had followed, and although we were unable to see its
+source, there could be no doubt that it descended from the lofty range
+before us.  A portion of the plateau was covered by a forest, nourished
+by numerous rivulets, most of which flowed into larger streams, although
+some found an outlet towards the southward.  No signs of inhabitants
+were visible; but game of every kind was most abundant, herds of deer,
+mountain sheep, and birds of all descriptions.
+
+"I am not the man to propose going back," said Uncle Jeff; "but unless
+we can find an opening in these rocks, it is very clear that our present
+party cannot go forward.  I propose, therefore, that we should camp here
+until we have explored the country ahead, after which we shall be able
+to form our plans."
+
+He looked towards Clarice as he spoke.  He had resolved not to expose
+her to the fatigue and peril which his experience told him must
+inevitably be endured by those attempting to make their way through so
+wild a region as that before us.  He therefore selected a suitable spot
+for camping.  Clarice's tent was put up, and we cut down poles and
+boughs with which to form a couple of small huts for ourselves.  Uncle
+Jeff, Manley, and I had one, and the two men the other.
+
+While the sergeant and Pat were employed in erecting the huts, the rest
+of us took our rifles and started in search of game, and before long we
+caught sight, towards the northern end of the valley, of several elk or
+moose feeding near a wood.  It was necessary to approach them
+cautiously, however, for should they take the alarm they would be off at
+a rate which would give us little chance of overtaking them.  But the
+wind came from them to us, and this was to our advantage.
+
+The elk is one of the most wary of the deer tribe, and, notwithstanding
+his enormous horns, he can pass through a thick forest, as he throws
+them back on his shoulders so as in no way to impede his progress.
+Large as was the wapiti which we had before met with, the elk is still
+larger, and one of the animals we saw before us was fully seven feet in
+height--as tall, indeed, as many an elephant.  As the flesh is very
+palatable food, we were eager to kill one or more of the herd.  Uncle
+Jeff, too, said that he wanted the skins to assist in making a tent, in
+case we should have to remain some time at our present location.
+
+Creeping along, then, as much under cover as possible, we endeavoured to
+get within shot of the animals.  We succeeded at last in reaching the
+wood, and hoped, by making our way through it concealed by the trees, to
+get up to them before we were discovered.  Uncle Jeff led the way, while
+Manley and I followed in Indian file.  It was important not only to keep
+ourselves concealed, but to avoid making any noise, as the elk has a
+remarkably acute sense of hearing, and the slightest sound might startle
+the herd.
+
+We had succeeded in gaining a spot a thousand yards or so from them,
+when I heard a noise in the bushes on our left, and rather ahead, the
+herd being on the right.  On looking narrowly in the direction from
+whence the sound came, I caught sight of a panther, or "American lion,"
+as the beast is commonly called, stealing along, very probably on the
+same errand as we were,--hoping to pounce upon one of the females of the
+herd, could he catch his prey unprepared.  He is bound to be cautious,
+however, how he attacks a buck, for the elk can do battle with his horns
+and hoofs, and might disable even the savage panther.
+
+Uncle Jeff saw the brute as soon as I did, and turning round, he made a
+sign to me to aim at the panther the moment he should fire at the elk.
+In the meantime, the panther was so intent on reaching his expected prey
+that he was not likely to observe us.  As may be supposed, I kept a
+watchful eye on the wild beast, for he might possibly become aware of
+our presence; and if so, might content himself with a human being for
+his supper instead of venison, and I had no fancy to give him an
+opportunity of selection.
+
+It was very exciting having both the panther and deer before us.
+Frequently Uncle Jeff stopped, fearful of being discovered by the elk;
+while the panther, for the same reason, did likewise.  Thus the savage
+beast would creep on and on, crouching down and concealing himself from
+view.  He so far interfered with our sport, that we could have the
+chance of killing only two deer instead of three; for I was to reserve
+my fire for his benefit, and I ardently hoped I should not miss.  I
+tried to make Manley understand that it would be prudent in him not to
+fire until he saw whether my bullet took effect, but I could not be
+certain what he would do.
+
+Our progress was now slower than ever.  Several times the deer had
+looked up, apparently suspecting that danger was near; but still Uncle
+Jeff advanced, in a stooping posture, unwilling to stir even the
+smallest twig for fear of alarming the wary herd.  I moved on more
+rapidly; the panther was now not more than twenty yards from us, and
+would in a few seconds make his deadly spring.
+
+Suddenly Uncle Jeff stopped, raised his rifle to his shoulder, and
+fired.  The panther at that moment was rising, about to dash forward
+from the brushwood.  I pulled the trigger; at the same instant Manley
+fired--he had aimed at the deer--and as the smoke cleared away I saw the
+panther fall back on the ground.
+
+The deer were now in full flight, so I followed Uncle Jeff and Manley in
+the direction the herd were taking towards the north end of the valley.
+What means they had of escape we could not tell; we hoped that, shut in
+by the mountain, we might again get near enough to have another shot.
+
+The wounded elk was evidently severely hurt, for his pace now began to
+slacken, so Uncle Jeff cheered us on.  We saw, however, that unless we
+could soon come up with the chase he might escape us altogether.  The
+appearance of the country had changed, too; while rocks arose at some
+distance, there was evidently a vast intervening chasm between us and
+them.
+
+Once more Uncle Jeff fired, but, although the bullet took effect, the
+deer continued his course.  Almost immediately afterwards, what was our
+disappointment to see the wounded animal, regardless of the fate he was
+about to suffer, spring over the edge of a precipice, while the rest of
+the herd scampered away towards some almost inaccessible rocks on the
+left!
+
+The elk was irretrievably lost.  In vain we searched for a way by which
+we might reach the bottom of the gorge; we were soon convinced that the
+cliff was utterly impracticable.
+
+"It can't be helped," cried Uncle Jeff; "but we must not give up the
+hope of obtaining some venison this evening.  The elk will not long
+remain out on these barren rocks, and if we can hide ourselves near
+where they have to pass, we may each of us kill one."
+
+We were not long in finding some thick bushes behind which we could
+kneel and take good aim at the passing deer.
+
+"Do not let us be greedy," said Uncle Jeff; "you and Manley, Ralph,
+select one animal, and I will take another."
+
+In half an hour or less the deer came trotting back towards their former
+feeding-ground, and we all three fired; Uncle Jeff knocked over a buck,
+and we killed a doe.
+
+It took us some time to cut them up, and it was nearly dark before we
+reached the spot where I had shot the panther.  Anxious to know whether
+it was still alive, I made my way through the wood to the place, but
+could nowhere find the animal.  Had it escaped, notwithstanding its
+wound?  It was too dark, however, to search for it; so we hurried on as
+fast as we could with our load of venison to the camp, where Clarice was
+eagerly looking out for us.  The huts were erected by this time, and a
+blazing fire lighted; and I noticed that Clarice's tent had been
+carefully staked round by the sergeant, so that no wild beast could
+break suddenly into it.
+
+"I am afraid, Miss Middlemore, that you will grow very weary of the
+rough life we are compelled to lead," observed Manley.
+
+"Oh no!  I enjoy it very much indeed," she answered, looking up in his
+face, "and shall be really sorry when it comes to an end."
+
+"I doubt that very much, young lady," said Uncle Jeff.  "We have only
+just commenced the passage of the mountains, and I have made up my mind
+not to let you go on unless some tolerably easy path can be found over
+them.  I am very much afraid, however, that we shall not discover one
+fit for you to travel on."
+
+"Then what are we to do, Uncle Jeff?" asked Clarice.
+
+"I will tell you," he answered.  "I propose remaining here with one of
+the men, while Lieutenant Broadstreet, the other man, and Ralph, try to
+make their way across the mountains.  They may manage to do it; but if
+they had you with them, they would probably fail--no disrespect to your
+prowess, so don't pout your lips."
+
+"What do you say to my plan, lieutenant?"
+
+"Although I would rather have Miss Middlemore's company, yet I confess
+that I should be often very anxious about her and her servant venturing
+into places through which I should not hesitate to penetrate alone.  I
+consider your plan, therefore, under the circumstances, the best that
+could be adopted; and as you promise me the assistance of Ralph, I will
+leave Pat Sperry to attend on you--and Pat is a trustworthy fellow, when
+the liquor bottle is kept out of his way."
+
+I do not think Clarice liked this plan, but she had no valid objection
+to urge against it; indeed, when she looked up at the snowy mountains
+before us, and the vast chasms which yawned on each side, she must have
+owned to herself that she was unfitted to travel through such a region.
+
+Next morning we sent the two men for the deer skins, and a further
+supply of venison; but when they came back they brought the skin of the
+panther as well.  They had found the animal close to the body of the
+deer, by the scent of which he must have been attracted; but he must
+have died of his wounds before he had begun to eat the flesh.
+
+We spent the rest of the day in making pemmican, and in doing up our
+packages in a more compact form.  The larger part of our stores we left
+for the party in camp--only taking powder and shot, a small quantity of
+coffee, and a few simple cooking utensils, so that we might travel as
+lightly as possible.  We had little doubt about being able to obtain a
+sufficient supply of game; and Sergeant Custis, who was a bit of a
+botanist, said that he hoped to find roots which would serve as
+vegetables.
+
+Early in the morning, having said good-bye to our friends, we set out.
+The valley was soon crossed, and we then proceeded along the base of the
+mountains to the southward, in the hope of finding some opening in the
+cliffs, or a practicable path up which we might climb.  Our rifles were
+slung at our backs, and we each carried a long pole, on the strength of
+which we could thoroughly depend.
+
+At length we came to an opening.  It did not look very promising, but it
+was the only one which offered us any means of penetrating into the
+mountains, and ultimately, as we hoped, of getting over them.  For some
+distance we kept along a ledge which gradually ascended, with a steep
+precipice on one side and an almost perpendicular cliff on the other.
+Gradually, however, the ledge became broader, and we forced our way
+among the trees which grew on it.
+
+Manley proved himself an excellent mountaineer; and as I had for many
+years been accustomed to climbing, I ventured along paths which many
+would have hesitated to follow.
+
+I cannot describe the whole of that day's journey--the dreadful
+precipices along which we scrambled, the profound gorges into which it
+almost made the head giddy to look down, the rugged heights we climbed,
+the thick forests of pine through which we penetrated.  Still, we did
+not complain, hoping that success would crown our efforts.
+
+At length we reached a place near trees and water, which would supply us
+with the only necessaries we required; so we built a rough shelter with
+boughs, for the wind was piercingly cold.  We were able to defy it,
+however, with the help of a large fire, which we kept blazing in front
+of our hut.
+
+We were making better progress than I had expected, but still range upon
+range of snowy mountains lay between us and the western slopes which it
+was our object to descend.  Perhaps our trials and fatigues had only
+just commenced.  However, none of us were inclined to give in; and as we
+got some sound sleep by turns, we were prepared after breakfast to set
+out again.
+
+Up, up we went, the cold increasing rapidly.  Every hollow below us was
+filled with snow; still, we could find no canon or gorge of any
+description through which to make our way.  Over the range we must go--
+or, at all events, some lofty shoulder of it.  We had now to encounter a
+new description of danger, too.  The snow lay on the only practicable
+path, and it might conceal deep crevasses; or an avalanche might descend
+from above, and overwhelm us; or the mass, slipping from beneath our
+feet, might carry us down into one of the fathomless chasms below.
+Notwithstanding this, we went on and on, until it would have been as
+dangerous to turn back as to go forward.
+
+I was taking the lead, when, on turning an angle of a rock, I saw spread
+out before me a valley so broad that my eye could scarcely reach the
+opposite side.  Flowing through it were numerous streams; a large lake,
+many miles in extent, occupied its centre; while hills and forests
+dotted it in all directions.  But, as I looked below, I saw a precipice
+of fearful depth, which it would be impossible to descend.
+
+I had observed, as I came by, a steep slope leading upwards on our
+right, thickly covered with snow.  I thought, however, that it might
+afford us a way by which, having ascended it, we could reach a part of
+the mountain from whence to descend with less risk than from that on
+which we now stood, so I shouted to my companions to take it.  Sergeant
+Custis heard me, and we mounted together, expecting that Manley would
+follow.
+
+I looked round to speak to him, when what was my horror to see him
+gliding rapidly down, surrounded by a vast mass of crumbling snow,
+towards the edge of the precipice which I have just mentioned!  My heart
+sank within me.  To render him any assistance was impossible; in a few
+minutes he would be dashed to pieces.  I should have been horrified to
+see any human being in so fearful a predicament; but he was my friend,
+the first I had ever possessed.  I thought, also, of the grief the news
+of his death would cause my sweet sister Clarice.  How should I be able
+to tell her of it?  These thoughts flashed across my mind.
+
+Close to the very edge of the precipice, a mass of jagged rock stood
+out.  Already Manley had disappeared, and the snow went thundering down.
+For a moment I felt inclined to let myself glide down also.  Just then
+I heard a voice; it was Manley shouting out to us not to attempt to come
+to his rescue.  When about to be hurled over the edge of the precipice,
+he had clutched the jutting rock, and held on for his life, while the
+snow went rushing by under his feet.  He waited until it had ceased to
+fall, and then, clutching the sides of the rock, by a powerful effort
+slowly worked himself upward until at last he gained the firmer part of
+the snow.  Still, he several times cried out to us not to attempt to
+join him, lest our united weight might again set the mass in motion.
+
+"I have indeed been mercifully preserved," he said, when, having
+rejoined us, we congratulated him on his escape.  "I pray that we may
+succeed in getting down into the valley, although at present I see no
+path open to us."
+
+After climbing some way, we found a gap in the rocks, which, although
+full of snow, afforded a sufficiently firm footing to enable us to get
+on without much difficulty.  From thence, although the descent was not
+without danger, we succeeded in reaching a broad ledge free from snow.
+Here some bushes grew, of sufficient size to afford us fuel; and
+sheltered in the hollow of a rock, we passed the night in tolerable
+comfort.
+
+On the return of day we recommenced our search for a practicable way
+down the mountain; and happily finding it, we at length reached one of
+the lower heights of the wide valley I have mentioned.  I call it a
+valley, but it was rather a large basin, surrounded, as far as the eye
+could reach, by lofty mountains.
+
+"Now we are here, how are we ever to get out again?"  I asked Manley.
+
+"Where those rivers find an outlet, so probably shall we," he answered.
+"There can be no doubt that two or perhaps more canons lead into this
+basin,--some to the north and east, so far as I can judge, and others to
+the west,--and by them, without having any ascent to climb, we shall
+probably be able to make our way in the direction we wish to go."
+
+Having the day before us, we proceeded westward across the basin.  We
+soon found, however, that it was anything but level.  Large hills, many
+of which might have been dignified by the title of mountains, rose up in
+various directions.  One object, however, engaged our attention in the
+far distance: it was a beautiful sheet of water, blue as the sky
+overhead--like a jewel in a setting of green.
+
+Nowhere could we see any Indian wigwams, but here and there we observed
+what appeared like smoke rising above the trees.
+
+"I very much doubt if what we see is smoke," observed Manley; "it looks
+more like vapour; and, from the appearance of this region, I suspect
+that some volcanic action is going forward.  However, we shall discover
+that as we proceed."
+
+Although we at first fancied we had reached the valley's level, we found
+we had still a considerable descent to make, and that we could not hope
+to arrive that day on the banks of the lake.  We therefore encamped on
+the borders of a forest overlooking a stream which evidently ran into
+the lake, and which would serve to guide us the next day.  The stream
+was bordered by rocks of a curious form, but we had not time to examine
+them before it was dark, as we had to make our usual preparations for
+passing the night.
+
+Sergeant Custis at once took the can to get some water from a spring
+which, not for off, issued from a rock and fell into a basin.  From the
+regular appearance of this basin, we might have supposed it to have been
+artificial.  The sergeant dipped in his can, but he drew it back in a
+great hurry, exclaiming, "Why, it's at boiling heat!"
+
+We hurried up, and found that such was indeed the case.  As the water
+had a peculiar taste, we agreed not to use it for cooking, lest it might
+have some pernicious effect; so the sergeant had a considerable distance
+to go before he could get down to fill his can.
+
+It had now become quite dark, and we were seated round our camp-fire,
+when we heard low rumbling sounds; and great was our astonishment to
+see, by the light of the moon, which just then appeared from behind a
+cloud, a lofty jet of silvery water, rising, as it seemed to us, a
+hundred feet or more into the air!  Although our curiosity was excited,
+we had no wish to venture towards the spot in the darkness, as we hoped
+to be able to examine it the next morning.
+
+Scarcely had we placed our heads on the fir-tops which formed our
+couches, when hideous sounds burst forth from the forest.  The
+screeching of night-birds, the barking of coyotes, the dismal howling of
+the llovas, the cry of the panther, and other sounds, well-nigh drove
+sleep from our eyelids, and showed us that this region must be thickly
+inhabited by the wild beasts of the forest, although no human beings
+might be found within it.  Having plenty of powder and shot, however, we
+were not alarmed on that account.  Still, it was necessary to keep up a
+blazing fire, and to watch vigilantly, lest any unwelcome visitor might
+intrude upon us, and still more unpleasantly disturb our night's rest.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN.
+
+ADVANCE TOWARDS A BEAUTIFUL LAKE--HOT SULPHUR SPRINGS MET WITH--BOILING
+MUD POTS--CURIOUS BASINS FORMED BY WATER IN THE SIDE OF THE MOUNTAIN--
+LOVELY FRETWORK ROUND THEIR RIMS--NEARLY SINK INTO A BOILING MUD POOL--
+THE LAKE REACHED--ABUNDANCE OF GAME AND FISH--BUILD A RAFT--BEGIN VOYAGE
+ACROSS LAKE--VIOLENT STORM--IN GREAT DANGER--DRIVEN ACROSS THE LAKE--WE
+CLING TO TREES WHILE THE RAFT IS DASHED TO PIECES--MAKE OUR WAY THROUGH
+THE FOREST--I MISS MY COMPANIONS, AND LOSE MY GUN AND KNAPSACK OVER A
+PRECIPICE--REACH FOOT OF MOUNTAIN--I CAMP WITHOUT SUPPER OR FIRE.
+
+In spite of the fearful noises produced by the savage inhabitants of
+that region, and certain slow, ominous rumbling sounds which came up
+from the direction of the waterspout, when we did go to sleep we slept
+soundly enough.  At length the sergeant, who had taken the last watch,
+roused up Manley and me, and we started to our feet--my first impulse
+being to look out for the jet of water which I supposed I had seen on
+the previous evening, but which was now nowhere visible.
+
+"If we have got into an enchanted land, as the Indians suppose it is,
+the fairies or spirits have not thought fit, during the night, to
+trouble us," said Manley, laughing.  "Our business now is to try and
+make our way across this valley--so, forward!"
+
+After breakfast, we strapped on our packs and recommenced our march, our
+object being to reach the shore of the lake as soon as possible.  If
+there were any native inhabitants in this region, they would probably be
+found there; and we would either get them to put us across the lake in
+their canoes, or else we would skirt along it until we could again take
+a westerly course.
+
+We soon found that we had got into a region subject to violent volcanic
+action, and were compelled to turn aside to avoid a wide space full of
+ponds, the intervals between which were covered with a crust of
+brimstone.  I attempted to reach one of the ponds, but had not gone far
+when the point of my pole went through the crust, and up bubbled a
+quantity of black slime.  On touching it, and finding it scalding hot, I
+shouted to my companions, who were behind, not to venture on the
+treacherous ground.  A horror seized me, and every instant I feared that
+I should break through the surface.  Should that take place, what a
+dreadful fate would be mine!  I hastened back, stepping cautiously, as
+if moving over ice too thin to bear my weight; and very thankful I was
+when I once more got on hard ground.
+
+Still further on, as we proceeded down the valley, we saw vapour rising
+from numerous fissures in the hill-sides.  Around these vents quantities
+of sulphur had been deposited.  But the most curious objects were basins
+of all sizes, nearly circular, of which there were great numbers--
+formed, apparently, by the lime contained in the hot springs.  Some of
+these springs were exhausted; others, as they gushed forth from the
+mountain-side, were hot enough to boil potatoes.  Beautiful as was the
+appearance of the basins, we were too eager to push forward, to examine
+them minutely.  One was from twelve to twenty feet in diameter, and had
+a beautifully scalloped border.  So perfect was the shading of the
+scallops, that it looked like a most delicate work of art rather than
+the production of nature.  From the centre spouted up water to the
+height of seven or eight feet.  Farther on was another boiling spring,
+of far greater dimensions,--a horrible-looking caldron, the water dark
+and muddy, and in ceaseless agitation.
+
+"Here is a pot suitable for the witches' caldron in Macbeth," cried out
+Manley.
+
+He was rather ahead of me, and on overtaking him I found him standing by
+the side of a circular basin whose diameter we calculated to be fully
+twenty feet.  The contents consisted of what greatly resembled hasty
+pudding, or, as Manley said, "a huge caldron of thick mash."  The whole
+surface was bubbling up every instant, and giving off a thud like the
+noise produced by the escape of the gas below.
+
+Curious as these sights were, we were still more astonished by the
+appearance of the side of the mountain, the base of which we passed.
+All up the slope was seen, as it were, one above another, a succession
+of large basins or reservoirs.  The margins were beautifully scalloped
+and adorned with natural bead-work of exquisite beauty.  In spite of our
+hurry, we could not resist the temptation of making our way up to them.
+One of the largest springs we calculated to be fully thirty feet in
+diameter; and so perfectly transparent was the water, that, as we looked
+down into it, we could see to the very bottom.  Its sides were
+ornamented with coral-like forms of various shades, from pure white to
+bright cream-yellow, while the blue sky overhead gave an azure tint to
+the whole surface which no art could imitate.  Over several parts of the
+rim the water was flowing down into other basins.  I climbed up and
+looked over into one of the pools, which was literally hanging on to the
+one above it like a bird's nest to a wall; while beautiful stalactites
+were suspended below it, caused by the water which flowed over the
+sides.  The temperature of the water when it came out of the side of the
+mountain was high, but in the course of its passage from pool to pool it
+became gradually cooler.
+
+"I cannot resist the temptation of taking a bath in one of these
+beautiful basins," exclaimed Manley.
+
+Selecting one, I followed his example; and the sergeant was soon sitting
+in a third, with his head just above the water.  Nothing could be more
+refreshing and invigorating, and when we got out we all agreed that we
+felt better able to continue our journey.
+
+We found that the clear atmosphere of this region greatly deceived us as
+to distances, and it was not until the following day that we arrived on
+the shores of the lake.  It was nearly evening when, after having
+penetrated a thick pine forest, we at length stood on its borders.  Few
+lake-scenes could be more beautiful than that now spread out before us.
+The southern shore was indented with long narrow inlets, while
+pine-crowned promontories stretched from the base of the hills on every
+side.  Islands of emerald hue dotted its surface, and round the margin
+was a sparkling belt of yellow sand.  The surface, unruffled by a breath
+of air, was of a bright green near the shore, shading into a dark
+ultramarine towards the centre.  Whether there were fish, we had yet to
+discover; but we had no fear of starving, for the whole surface of the
+lake swarmed with birds--swans, gulls, pelicans, geese, herons, brants,
+sand-hill cranes, and many varieties of ducks.  An island in view was
+literally white with the numbers of pelicans which had taken up their
+abode upon it.  We had also seen many other birds during the day--
+eagles, hawks, ravens, ospreys, prairie-chickens, grouse, mocking-birds,
+and woodpeckers; while we caught sight of several kinds of deer, elk,
+and mountain sheep.  Even buffalo had made their way into the valley.
+Grizzly bears and panthers, too, we had good reason to fear, abounded,
+and were likely to be troublesome to us.
+
+We formed our camp on the shore of the lake, where there was fuel in
+abundance; and taking my gun, in the course of a quarter of an hour I
+shot geese and ducks enough to give us an ample supper, and breakfast
+next morning.  Manley, who was a good angler, had, in the meantime, been
+fitting up a rod and line--for he had brought hooks with him; and I
+found, when I got back, that he and the sergeant had caught a dozen
+salmon-trout, between a pound and a pound and a half in weight.  Their
+colour was of a light grey above, and a pale yellow below.  The dorsal
+and caudal fins were dark grey, and the others mostly of a brilliant
+orange or bright yellow.
+
+We calculated that the lake was fully twenty miles long, and not less
+than fifteen broad in its widest part; and had we not been in a hurry to
+proceed on our journey, we agreed that we would have willingly spent
+some days in this enchanting spot.  However, this was not to be thought
+of.
+
+We kept up a blazing fire all night, and consequently escaped a visit
+from either grizzly or panther.  The question now was, "How were we to
+cross the lake?"  We were none of us much accustomed to boating,
+although Sergeant Custis knew more about it than either Manley or I.  At
+first we talked of building a canoe, but the sergeant suggested that, as
+it would take some time to construct one, it would be better to form a
+raft, which could be put together in a few hours.
+
+"If the water remains as quiet as it does at present, we can soon paddle
+to the other side; and we can also rig a mast and yard, on which we can
+make a very good sail with our blankets," he observed.
+
+At daylight we commenced to build a raft.  There were logs enough of
+every size and length in the forest, and we selected those only which we
+could drag with ease to the water's edge.  Lithe vines, of which there
+were plenty hanging to the trees, served instead of ropes, and with
+these we bound our logs together.  As the pine-wood was heavy, we formed
+a platform on the top of the logs with smaller poles and lighter
+branches, interwoven, and bound together as tightly as we considered
+necessary for the easy voyage we proposed to undertake.
+
+We were, it must be understood, at the north-east end of the lake.  On
+the west side was the promontory which we hoped to reach, and beyond it
+a deep gulf ran up the shore, the farther end of which we could not
+distinguish.
+
+Some hours were passed in constructing the raft.  We had then to cut out
+the paddles, a long oar to steer by, and also the mast and yard.  These,
+although they were very roughly formed, occupied us some time longer, so
+that it was late in the day before we were ready to commence our voyage.
+We calculated, however, that we should have no difficulty in getting
+across before sundown; and as the evening promised to be calm and
+beautiful, we expected to have a pleasant passage.  The wind, too, was
+favourable, blowing from the eastward, and would help us along,--
+although, as it was very light, we must be prepared to use our paddles.
+
+The raft had been built in the water, so that all we had to do was to
+step on board, set our sail, and shove off.  "Away we go!" cried Manley,
+giving a shove with the steering oar, and we glided off from the shore.
+
+Sergeant Custis quickly set the sail, which, as we got a little way on,
+blew out with the breeze.  He and I then plied the paddles.  We appeared
+to be making fair progress, too, although the raft moved but slowly.
+But the wind soon dying away, we had our paddles alone to depend on.
+Manley tried to scull with the oar, but he was not an adept at the art,
+and it did not help us much.  When we watched the shore we had left, we
+saw that we had made some progress; but when we looked ahead towards the
+side of the lake we wished to reach, it appeared no nearer than when we
+stood on the shore we had left, while the mountains rose towering up
+above our heads as gigantic as ever.  The sun had already disappeared
+beyond the pine-clad heights to the west, leaving the valley in rapidly
+increasing shade.
+
+"I doubt, Ralph, whether we shall set foot on shore much before
+midnight, unless we move at a faster rate than we are now doing," said
+Manley.
+
+I agreed with him; observing, however, that a moonlight voyage on that
+calm lake would be pleasant in the extreme, and a thing to be
+remembered.
+
+Not expecting to be so long on the raft, and intending to have supper on
+our arrival, we grew very hungry.  Fortunately we had plenty of cooked
+provisions, and fresh water alongside, so that we had no difficulty in
+satisfying our appetites.
+
+While the sergeant was engaged in again doing up the pack, a sudden
+squall struck our sail, carrying away the mast, and had I not sprung up
+and seized hold of it, the blanket would have been lost.  Fortunately I
+caught it before it was wet.  This squall was quickly followed by
+another, and we could see the white-topped waves curling up around us on
+all sides.  Our raft was but ill calculated to buffet with a tempest
+such as seemed but too likely to come on.  The wind being as yet
+favourable, however, the sergeant attempted to repair the mast and
+re-hoist the sail; but scarcely had he done so when it was again carried
+away.
+
+"We must trust to our paddles, and the wind will still drive us along,"
+said Manley.
+
+We could hear the wind roaring among the trees on the shore, and every
+instant it increased, raising up big waves which threatened to sweep
+over us.  The raft was tossed and tumbled about, and sometimes it was
+with difficulty we could hold on sufficiently to prevent ourselves from
+being shaken off into the seething water.  We had, fortunately, at the
+suggestion of the sergeant, secured our rifles and knapsacks to the top
+of the platform in the centre of the raft, where they were tolerably
+secure.
+
+We were now driving on much faster than we had hitherto been doing, but
+the darkness prevented us from knowing whether it was in the right
+direction, for we could see only the foaming waters dancing up around
+us.  All we could do, therefore, was to hold on, and try with the
+steering oar to keep the raft before the wind, hoping that we might be
+driven into some sheltered bay, where we could land in safety.
+
+I thought of what Clarice would have said, if she had been with
+us--"Trust in God"--and I felt sure that she would not have been more
+alarmed than we were.  We saw our danger,--we could not be blind to
+that,--but none of us gave way to cowardly fears.  Manley sat with
+perfect calmness, steering, while Sergeant Custis and I paddled away,
+endeavouring to keep the raft before the following seas.  At last I
+caught sight of some dark object rising out of the water, but instead of
+being ahead, it was on the right hand, or, as we judged, to the
+northward of us.  It was evidently land, but whether the end of the
+island we had seen in that part of the lake, or the mainland, we could
+not determine.  In vain we attempted to paddle up to it; the gale drove
+us on, and showed us that we were perfectly unable to go in any
+direction excepting that towards which the wind should impel us.
+
+Again we lost sight of the land, and this led us to think that we must
+have passed an island.  The waves hissed and foamed, and danced up
+around us as much as ever; still our raft held together, and we were
+enabled to cling on to it.  Even if we were only moving at the rate of
+two miles an hour, it could not take us more than seven or eight hours
+to get across from one side of the lake to the other, and we calculated
+that we must already have been that time on the raft.  What if we had
+got into a channel of some river, which might rush rapidly along,
+pouring over some terrific cataract?  Should we by any means be able to
+reach the shore, so as to escape being carried along with the raft?  Had
+it been daylight, the danger would not have been so great, for we might
+have seen in what direction to direct our efforts.  As it was, we might,
+should we paddle to one side or the other, be placing ourselves in
+greater danger than by allowing the raft to drive on before the gale.
+Our ears were assailed by the continued roar of the waves dashing on the
+shore, of the wind rushing through the trees, and of the foaming waters
+as they clashed against each other; we sometimes, indeed, could scarcely
+hear each other's voices.  There being now no sail, we were able to keep
+our eyes turning in every direction.
+
+"When we do reach the shore, we must take care not to lose our things,"
+said Manley, with due thought.  "Let each man seize his rifle and
+knapsack; for if we fail to get into a harbour, we shall probably be
+dashed against a rocky shore, or among overhanging trees, where our raft
+will, no doubt, quickly be knocked to pieces."
+
+Dangerous as was our present position, we had to confess that the
+operation of landing might prove even more perilous; still we were eager
+to go through it, trusting that, notwithstanding the danger, we should
+escape.
+
+At length Sergeant Custis cried out, "Land ahead!  We shall be close to
+it in a few minutes.  It seems to me to be covered with wood, with
+mountains rising beyond.  Yes! no doubt about it!  We must each try to
+get hold of a stout branch or trunk of a tree, and cling on to it until
+daylight returns and we can see our way."
+
+The sergeant was right, although the time we took to reach the shore was
+longer than he expected it would be.  In daylight we could have made our
+escape without difficulty, but now we ran the most fearful risk of being
+crushed against the raft, as it surged up and down; or against the
+trees, which hung, some with their branches in the water, others but
+slightly raised above it, while the seething waters whirled and leapt
+around their trunks with a force which must soon reduce our raft to
+fragments.
+
+"Now is our time!" cried the sergeant.  "Quick, quick, gentlemen!" and
+seizing a branch, he swung himself up into a tree, hauling his rifle and
+knapsack after him.  The next instant he extended his hand to me, by
+which assistance I was enabled to follow his example.  On looking round,
+I lost sight of Manley.  Had he been washed off, or struck by a bough?
+
+"Manley, Manley!"  I shouted; "where are you?"
+
+"All right!" he answered, greatly to my relief.
+
+The sound came from a distance, for even after I had left the raft it
+had been driven some way on before he could manage to grasp a bough.  We
+had at all events succeeded in our object of crossing the lake, although
+we had not landed exactly in the manner we desired, nor could we tell
+our whereabouts.  We might be at the very southern end of the lake,
+should the wind have shifted to the northward, or we might be at its
+western extremity.  Wherever we were, there we must remain until
+daylight; for were we to attempt moving, in the pitchy darkness which
+hung around, we might fall off into the water, or lose ourselves in the
+forest.
+
+"It cannot be far off daylight, sergeant," I observed.
+
+"I think not," he answered; "but I would advise you to take care not to
+drop off to sleep.  If you do, you may chance to fall into the water.
+It will be as well to caution the lieutenant, or he, being alone, may
+forget himself."
+
+Considering the noise of the waves dashing under our feet, the waving of
+the trees, and the howling of the wind amid them, I did not think the
+caution very necessary; but, notwithstanding, I shouted out to Manley.
+
+"No fear of that," he answered.  "It would require a more comfortable
+spot for a bivouac, to induce me to take a snooze."
+
+That night appeared to me the longest I can remember.  Days appeared to
+have passed since we had left the eastern shore, with the bright
+sunlight and the calm blue water.  Still, day must return.  What a
+comfort that thought often is!  The roar of the waters gradually
+decreased, the wind having fallen, and thus, in spite of the sergeant's
+warning, my head was beginning to nod, when he cried out--
+
+"Here is daylight at last; I see a tint of red over the snowy tops of
+the mountains.  We shall have the sun himself sending his warm rays down
+upon us before long."
+
+His voice aroused me in a moment Manley answered his hail; and as the
+light increased we saw that we were at the farther end of what might be
+the main body of the lake, or a branch running off it.  It was in
+reality the great western arm of the lake, and we had been carried many
+miles on our journey, in the exact direction we wished to go.
+
+We had soon light enough to enable us to crawl off the branches to which
+we had clung, and make our way down to the ground--if ground it could be
+called, for, in reality, in every direction it was covered thickly with
+logs in all stages of decay, some only lately fallen, others which could
+be knocked to pieces with a kick, while the feet sank at almost every
+step in decomposed vegetable matter.  Still this was the region through
+which, somehow or other, we must make our way.
+
+After an hour's toil we reached a small open space, where the ground was
+sufficiently hard to enable us to light a fire and dry our drenched
+clothes and blankets.  We had also to look to the priming of our rifles,
+as they were likely to have got damp, and might fail us at a pinch.
+Being unwilling to encamp in the forest altogether, though we all
+greatly required rest, we resolved to push on until we could reach more
+open ground where water was to be obtained.
+
+To save my companions labour, as I was a more practised backwoodsman
+than either of them, I offered to go ahead and try to find the shortest
+way out of the forest.  How far it might be, I could not tell; but I had
+hopes that the forest in which we were might prove to be only a belt of
+trees on the shore of the lake.
+
+It did not occur to me as possible that my companions could miss my
+trail.  I shouted now and then, however, but did not hear their voices
+in reply, the forest being so dense that sounds could not penetrate far
+through it I went on and on, feeling sure that I was directing my course
+to the westward.  The ground rose more and more, too, in some places
+rather abruptly, but still covered with a dense growth of trees, and
+soon I found that I was mounting a hill.  The path was more easy than at
+first, however, there being but few fallen trunks, so I made much better
+progress.
+
+"I must get out of this," at last I said to myself; and so I continued
+moving on, occasionally notching a tree with my axe, if I thought my
+trail was not sufficiently distinct.  "Of course they will follow," I
+thought more than once.  I did not, indeed, entertain a doubt about it.
+
+I had reached the top of the hill, but the trees were too high to enable
+me to see any of the country around.  I could judge by the direction of
+the sun's rays, however,--which had now drawn round, and were striking
+in my face,--that I was steering westward, as before.  I occasionally
+stopped and looked back, expecting that my friends would overtake me;
+and although I did not see them, I felt so sure that they must be close
+behind that I continued my course.
+
+On and on I went, when again I found myself descending, and thus knew
+that I had crossed over a hill of some height; still the trees prevented
+me from getting a view of the country beyond.  At last I came to some
+marshy ground of a similar character to that which I had met on the
+other side of the lake, with sulphur springs in the centre.  I had
+therefore to make a detour to avoid it, but as the tall trees which grew
+on the surrounding hills would not allow me to get a view of the
+country, I could not determine in what direction to steer my course.  I
+did not perceive an important circumstance.  Owing to the spongy nature
+of the ground, into which my feet sank at every step, the marks were
+soon obliterated, while I still supposed that my trail was sufficiently
+defined to enable Manley and the sergeant to follow me.
+
+I now mounted another hill, of a far more rugged character than the
+former ones which I had passed over.
+
+"Surely," I thought, "on the other side of this there must be open
+ground, where I shall be able to see my way ahead, and select a spot for
+our camp."  The hill, however, proved to be even more rugged than I had
+expected.  Still I did not like to go back, though the farther I went
+the wilder and more jagged it became.
+
+At last I found myself scrambling along the summit of a precipice, until
+I saw before me a foaming cascade falling down the precipitous rocks,
+with lofty pinnacles rising above it.  This formed a cataract which,
+after a short course, ran into a lakelet at the foot of the cliffs;
+while beyond was the open ground I had been hoping to find.
+
+Although a good cragsman, my climb had been a rough one, and I now sat
+down to rest on the top of the cliff before I commenced mounting higher,
+which it was necessary to do in order to get above the falls, and from
+thence make my way down the further side of the mountain on to the open
+ground.  To rest my shoulders, I had taken off my pack, and placed it
+with my rifle by my side.  I failed to notice, as I did so, the slippery
+nature of the rock, which was covered with a velvet-like surface of
+moss, produced by the constant spray from the waterfall.  Feeling
+thirsty, I thought that I could reach a small jet of water which,
+flowing amid the rocks, fell into the main cascade.  I therefore got up
+to make my way to it, and while doing so must have touched my rifle with
+my foot I obtained the water, although not without difficulty, and more
+danger than it was wise to run for the purpose.  But, on returning, what
+was my dismay to see neither rifle nor knapsack!  They had both, it was
+very evident, slipped over the cliff, and fallen into the lakelet.  Had
+I been alone, my loss would have been indeed a serious one, but as I
+hoped that my friends would soon overtake me, I did not allow it to
+depress my spirits.
+
+I approached as near to the edge of the cliff as I dared, thinking it
+possible that my rifle and knapsack might have fallen on some ledge, or
+perhaps been stopped in their downward progress by bushes; but, as far
+as I could judge, the precipice was perpendicular, and they must have
+fallen into the lakelet.  I saw at once, therefore, that there was very
+little chance of my being able to recover them; still that point could
+not be decided until I got down to the level of the lake, when I might
+ascertain its depth.  If not very deep, I might perhaps be able to dive
+to the bottom; but though naturally eager to make the attempt, I felt it
+would be safest to do nothing in the matter until I was joined by my
+friends.
+
+I waited a short time for their coming up, but as they did not appear, I
+thought it desirable to retrace my steps, in case they should have
+missed their way, or lost sight of my trail.  I accordingly went back,
+shouting out to them; but it was not until I came to the spongy ground I
+had passed, that I saw the probability of their having lost my trail and
+gone in some other direction.  In vain I searched for signs of them.
+Should I return to where I parted from them, a long time might elapse
+before we might meet; and my anxiety to try and recover my rifle and
+knapsack forbade me doing this.
+
+The day was advancing, and darkness would come on before I could get to
+the shore of the lake, so I again turned and made my way over the
+mountain till I got above the fall; from thence, with infinite labour
+and at no little risk, I ultimately succeeded in reaching the level
+ground.  I had now to go round the base of the mountain in order to
+reach the lake; but the distance was considerable, and I could scarcely
+hope to reach it before nightfall.  I felt, therefore, that it would be
+prudent to look out for a spot for camping.  A grove of trees of no
+great extent was before me, and their trunks would afford shelter; but
+what about a fire?  My flint and steel I had incautiously left in my
+knapsack, but I had a small burning-glass which one of our visitors at
+the farm had given me.  I had seldom made use of it, but I had put it in
+my pocket, with the few valuables I possessed, on the night we left
+Roaring Water.  As the sun had disappeared, that, however, would be of
+no use for the present; so I arrived at the unsatisfactory conclusion
+that I must pass the night without food or fire.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN.
+
+ALONE IN THE FOREST--AWAKENED BY THE CRY OF A PANTHER--THE BRUTE
+DISCOVERS ME--I TAKE REFUGE IN A TREE--THE PANTHER DISAPPEARS--A VISIT
+TO THE LAKE--VAIN EFFORTS TO RECOVER MY RIFLE AND KNAPSACK--I CONTINUE
+TOWARDS THE WEST, HOPING TO MEET MY FRIENDS--MORE SULPHUR SPRINGS--
+NEARLY OVERWHELMED BY A MUD VOLCANO--A POISONOUS VALLEY--CAUGHT IN A
+SNOW-STORM--BUILD A HUT--MY FARE, THISTLE ROOTS--MAKE TRAPS AND A
+FISHING-LINE--SALLY FORTH--CATCH THREE BEAVERS--FIND ANOTHER LAKE--
+SALMON-TROUT CAUGHT--CONTINUE DOWN A RIVER, AND COME UPON A NUMBER OF
+MAGNIFICENT GEYSERS--AM ABOUT TO TAKE UP MY ABODE IN A GROTTO, WHEN A
+HOT SPRING RISES FROM IT--I SHIFT MY QUARTERS--PREPARE FOR ANOTHER
+SOLITARY NIGHT--I HEAR A SHOT, AND A WOUNDED DEER BOUNDS NEAR ME.
+
+My exertions had made me hungry.  Recollecting the amount of animal life
+which abounded in that region, however, I had no great fear of starving
+altogether, for if I could not shoot I might trap animals.  I hoped,
+however, to be able to rejoin my companions the following day, when my
+wants would be supplied, so that I was not much out of spirits.  Should
+I fail to trap game at any time, or should I fail to meet my companions
+even for some days, there were, I remembered, roots of various sorts
+which might serve for food, though it was now too late to obtain them.
+Indeed, barely light enough remained to enable me to cut down some
+branches with which to form a slight hut.  I managed to collect a few to
+answer my purpose, the thick trunk of a tree serving as a back.  In
+spite of this shelter, it was very cold; but of course I made up my mind
+to endure it as best I could, and, in spite of hunger and anxiety, it
+was not long before I fell asleep.
+
+What time had elapsed I know not, when I was awakened by a shrill cry,
+almost like that of a human being.  I shouted out for help before I was
+quite awake, thinking it must come from my companions, who were in
+danger; but when completely aroused, I knew too well that it was the
+shriek of the panther which so often makes night hideous in the forests
+of the south.  What the brute was about, I could not tell; but as I knew
+he must be close to me, I again shouted out, hoping to frighten him
+away.  At the same time clutching hold of a low branch of the tree which
+hung directly overhead, I swung myself into it.
+
+Presently I saw the panther come out of a thicket close at hand, and
+smell round the hut.  He had only just discovered me, and seemed to have
+a strong inclination to make his supper off my body.  I did not feel
+altogether comfortable, even where I was, as I had a belief that
+panthers can climb, like most of the cat tribe, and that he might take
+it into his head to mount the tree.  I had no weapon besides my knife,
+but with that I managed to cut off a pretty thick branch, with which I
+hoped to be able to defend myself.
+
+As I found it very cold where I sat, my first object was to try and
+drive the brute away.  I therefore kept pelting him with pieces of
+withered branches, which I broke off; but to no purpose.  Still snarling
+occasionally, he kept smelling round and round the tree, frequently
+casting a look up at me with his glittering eyes.  Now and then he went
+to a little distance, and seemed about to spring into the tree.  At last
+he got into a position which enabled me to take good aim at him, and I
+threw a heavy piece of a branch, which hit him directly on the nose.  At
+the same time I sprung round the tree, so as to be concealed from his
+view.  He gave an upward glance; but not seeing me, he appeared to be
+seized with sudden fright, and, greatly to my satisfaction, went
+muttering away into the depths of the wood.
+
+Trusting that the panther would not come back, I descended the tree, and
+once more sought the shelter from which he had driven me.  The
+interruption to the night's repose had been somewhat unpleasant, but
+that did not prevent me sleeping on until daylight; after which I
+proceeded in the direction where I expected to find the lakelet into
+which my rifle and knapsack had dropped.
+
+I was considering what I should do for food, when I observed a green
+plant of a bright hue, with a small head, which I recognised as a
+thistle, the roots of which I had seen the Indians use for food.
+Pulling it up, I found it not unlike a radish in taste and consistency.
+Searching about, I soon found several more: and although not likely to
+be very nutritious, the roots served to stop the gnawings of hunger, and
+enabled me to make my way with a more elastic step.
+
+My thoughts were occupied as to the probability of finding Manley and
+the sergeant.  I hoped that, once clear of the forest, they might encamp
+and make a large fire, the smoke of which would serve to guide me to
+them.  Should they, on the contrary, continue searching about, we might
+miss each other.
+
+The shore of the lakelet was at last reached, but my first glance at it
+convinced me that there was every probability of its being of great
+depth.  The cliffs over which my rifle and knapsack had fallen went
+sheer down into it; while farther on the torrent brought a large supply
+of water, which found an exit on the opposite side.  The water was clear
+as crystal, and from the shore upon which I stood I could see the
+bottom.  When I put in my stick, however, I could not fathom it--and
+this at the shallowest part.  Still, my existence might depend upon
+recovering my rifle, so, throwing off my clothes, I plunged in and swam
+to the foot of the cliff.  I felt sure that I was under the very spot
+from whence the things had fallen, but when I looked down,
+notwithstanding the clearness of the water, I could not see them, nor
+the bottom, and this at once convinced me of the immense depth.  I had
+therefore to abandon all hope of recovering my rifle and knapsack, and
+swim back, not altogether without some fear of being seized with cramp
+from the coldness of the water.
+
+Quickly dressing, I ran on to warm myself, keeping as before to the
+west, as I felt sure that Manley and the sergeant would proceed in the
+same direction.  Coming to a high mound or hill, I climbed to the top,
+whence I could obtain a pretty extensive view; but nowhere could I see
+any objects moving which could be my friends.  A herd of elk were
+browsing in the far distance, and a number of mountain sheep were
+scampering about on the side of the neighbouring height.  My eyes were
+attracted, however, by some wreaths of vapour far down the valley, in
+the direction which it was probable Manley and the sergeant had taken.
+The vapour might arise from a fire they had kindled; but when I looked
+again, I saw not only one, but several wreaths, or rather jets, which
+made me fear that my first conjecture was wrong.  However, as these jets
+appeared in the right direction, I determined to go towards them.
+
+I descended from the height, and continued my course, feeling unusually
+weak and weary, when, some way along the valley, I observed several
+circular holes, full of mud of different colours bubbling up, while
+vapour issued from various fissures in the sides of the hills, and a
+sulphureous odour pervaded the air.
+
+Becoming more and more fatigued, at last I threw myself on the ground,
+and ate a few of the thistle roots which I had fortunately brought with
+me.  I remember noticing a large hole not far off, but it appeared to be
+empty.  I felt very drowsy, and dropped off to sleep before long, my
+head resting on my knees; when suddenly I became conscious of a loud
+rumbling sound, while the earth beneath me seemed to shake and upheave.
+
+Springing to my feet, what was my horror to see, close to me, a mass of
+dark water and mud rising up in the shape of a column!  Higher and
+higher it rose, surrounded by volumes of vapour; while from its summit
+was scattered far and wide thick lumps of mud.  Becoming aware that I
+had been sleeping close to an active mud geyser, I sprang away from the
+dangerous neighbourhood, narrowly escaping being overwhelmed with the
+hot and horrible mixture.  The spout, or column, I should think, must
+have risen to a height of nearly fifty feet; while every few seconds
+loud reports were heard, and with each report a dense volume of steam
+shot forth--the ground meanwhile shaking violently.
+
+I stood watching it till, gradually decreasing, the centre part of the
+column sank down into the orifice from which it had been expelled; and
+within a short time all was again quiet.  The mass of mud which covered
+the ground, and coated even the boughs of the neighbouring trees, alone
+showed the violent outbreak that had just taken place.
+
+As I advanced the valley began to narrow.  Miasmatic vapours, escaping
+from holes and crevices on either side, filled the air, making it
+difficult to breathe with freedom, so I hastened on, anxious to get out
+of so horrible a region.  To escape from it I climbed a hill, along the
+side of which I made my way as fast as the uneven nature of the ground
+and fallen logs and rocks would allow.
+
+I again got into a more open country, where I became conscious of a
+considerable change in the atmosphere.  Hitherto the air had been
+tolerably warm, though bracing; it now grew sensibly cooler.  Thick
+clouds were gathering in the sky.  The wind, before a gentle breeze, now
+rose rapidly, and blew with violence.  It soon became icy cold, and
+flakes of snow began to fall.  Without a fire, I felt I should well-nigh
+perish.  At all events, before I could make a fire I must search for
+some cavern in which to light it; or, failing to find a cavern, I must
+build a hut.  As the appearance of the ground did not indicate that
+caverns were likely to exist on the side of the hill, I set to work
+without delay to collect materials for building a hut; and having cut
+down a number of pine branches, I stuck them in the ground, weaving
+their tops together with vines, and piling as many rough pieces of bark
+against the side as I could find.
+
+In vain I watched for a gleam of sunshine, which would enable me, by
+means of my burning-glass, to kindle a fire.  The clouds gathered
+thicker and thicker; and no hope remained of my being able to obtain the
+desired spark.  Taking advantage, therefore, of the remaining light, I
+searched about and pulled up all the thistle roots I could find.  With
+this hermit-like fare, the only provender I was likely to obtain while
+the storm lasted, I retired into my hut.
+
+Scarcely had I got under shelter when down came the snow, and the whole
+face of the country was speedily covered with a sheet of white.  How
+long the storm might last, I could not tell; it might blow over in one
+or two hours, or days might elapse before it ceased.  It was too early
+in the year, however, to fear the setting in of winter weather, even in
+that elevated region, or my condition would indeed have been deplorable.
+
+I had kept an opening through which I could look over the valley, in
+case my friends might pass that way.  But night came on, and they did
+not appear; so, closing up my window, I coiled myself away to sleep, as
+the size of my hut would not allow me to stretch myself at full length.
+
+I had little fear that a panther would break into my bower; but I was
+not so confident that, should a grizzly scent me out, he might not poke
+in his nose.  Still I could trust to Him who had hitherto protected me.
+I had my knife and my long stick, and, at all events, I might give
+Master Bruin an unpleasant scratch on the snout, should he come within
+my reach.
+
+Notwithstanding my uncomfortable position, I was soon asleep, and did
+not awake until daybreak.  Had I possessed any means of cooking my
+roots, I might have made a tolerably satisfactory breakfast.  Indeed,
+although they assisted to sustain life, they were far from wholesome
+raw; still, to quell the cravings of hunger, I ate them.
+
+The storm continued to blow with as much violence as on the previous
+evening, and, lightly clad as I was, I felt that it would be rash to
+continue my course till it was over.  I sincerely hoped that Manley and
+the sergeant had found suitable shelter.  However, as they could light a
+fire, and had abundance of food, I was pleased to think that they were
+better off than I was.
+
+To employ the time, I tried to manufacture some traps of such materials
+as I possessed.  I then bethought me that I had a fish-hook in my
+pocket; but when I came to search for a line I could find none.  I had,
+however, a silk neckerchief; and having unravelled this, I twisted it
+with the greatest care into a strong thread.  It occupied a good deal of
+time, but I succeeded in three or four hours in forming a line of
+sufficient length for my purpose.  I had plenty of loose shot, too,
+which I split for weights.  I then carefully rolled up the line round a
+piece of wood, ready for use as soon as I should reach a lake or stream
+likely to contain trout.
+
+The storm lasted upwards of two days.  Although my journey was thus
+delayed, I felt sure my friends would likewise have been prevented from
+travelling, and thus I was none the less likely to meet them.  At length
+the wind subsided, the clouds dispersed, and the sun shone forth with
+dazzling brightness on the snow, which began quickly to disappear
+beneath his rays.
+
+Carrying the traps I had manufactured, and my fishing-line, I now
+sallied out.  I had exhausted all my roots, but as the snow cleared away
+I obtained a further supply, though, hungry as I was, I still had very
+little inclination to eat them raw.
+
+I had not gone far when I came to some boiling springs; one of which,
+although the water was of intense heat, was little larger than a
+good-sized caldron.  I threw in my roots, and sat down beside it to warm
+my feet, which were benumbed with the melting snow.  While my frugal
+dinner was cooking, I looked about in search of my friends; but again I
+was disappointed.  When I thought that the roots were sufficiently
+boiled, I raked them out with my stick.  They were certainly more
+palatable, and I hoped they would prove more nutritious.
+
+Every hour was now of importance, for Manley and the sergeant would, I
+calculated, be pushing on, under the belief that I was before them.  I
+had quenched my thirst with snow, for in that volcanic region I could
+find no water fit to drink; it was either intensely hot, or so
+impregnated with sulphur and other minerals that I was afraid to swallow
+it.  I saw that it would soon be necessary again to camp, so, that I
+might not have to pass the night without a fire, I endeavoured to obtain
+a light by means of my burning-glass, before the sun should descend too
+low.  The wood around was so wet that I feared, after all, I should not
+succeed; but having made my way to a forest on one side of the valley, I
+discovered some moss growing under the branches of a tree which had
+sheltered it from the wet.  Here also was abundance of dead wood.  With
+as much as I could carry I hurried back into the open, and sitting down,
+brought the glass to bear on the now fast sinking rays of the sun.  I
+watched the effect with almost trembling eagerness, till, greatly to my
+joy, from the small bright spot caused by the concentrated rays a thin
+thread of smoke began to ascend and spread over the moss.  This I blew
+gently, placing over it a few twigs at a time, until I soon had a brisk
+fire burning.
+
+The place where I had lighted my fire was not one at which I wished to
+camp, but once having a fire, I could carry a burning brand and ignite
+another in some more convenient situation.  I was not long in selecting
+a spot close under a rock, where I soon had a fire blazing up.  I thus
+had warmth, although I was still destitute of wholesome food; and,
+indeed, I found myself weaker than I had ever before been.
+
+I was not of a disposition to give way to despondency, but sombre
+thoughts would intrude.  I began to fear that I might not be able to
+rejoin my friends; that they, unable to find me, would suppose that I
+had met with some accident, and would at length make their way to the
+fort by themselves.  Had I possessed my rifle and knapsack, I should
+have had no fear on the subject, but the only means I had of obtaining
+food were precarious; and I could not cast off the thought that, should
+I continue to grow weaker, I might ultimately perish.
+
+I was soon shown, however, that I ought not to have desponded.  I was
+more successful with my beaver traps than I had expected; and,
+imperfectly formed as they were, I caught no less than three animals in
+them, which afforded me ample food, and greatly restored my strength.
+
+Pushing on over a wooded height, I saw below me a beautiful lake two or
+three miles long, and almost as many broad.  I hastened down to its
+shore, and having caught some grasshoppers on the way, I quickly had my
+line in the water.  Having chosen a favourable spot, scarcely a moment
+had passed before I hauled out a salmon-trout a pound or more in weight.
+In half an hour I had caught a dozen--as many as I could carry.  I
+therefore camped and cooked some of the fish, which afforded me a more
+satisfactory supper than I had eaten for many days.
+
+Seeing a stream running out of the lake, I next morning followed its
+course.  I cannot describe the beautiful waterfalls which I passed on my
+way, or the scenery, which was altogether very fine.  I hastened along,
+believing that the stream, from the direction it took, would lead to an
+outlet among the mountains.
+
+I had thus gone on for some miles, when the canon down which I was
+travelling widened, and suddenly I saw before me a scene far more
+wonderful than any I had yet witnessed.  In every direction over the
+broad valley, on both sides of the stream, rose a number of jets of
+sparkling water far surpassing in beauty the artificial fountains in the
+most celebrated gardens of royal mansions.
+
+I hurried on, to get a more perfect sight of this wonderful region.
+Suddenly, from a high mound some thirty feet or more above the level of
+the plain, I saw a jet burst forth, which rose to the height of one
+hundred and twenty or one hundred and thirty feet--a perfect geyser, the
+first real one I had yet seen.  It continued playing for fifteen minutes
+or more, the mass of water falling back into the basin, and then running
+over the edges and down the sides of the mound.  Others were playing all
+the time.  As I hastened on, from another cone a column shot upwards to
+a far greater height--considerably above two hundred feet, I should
+say--and lasted very much longer than the first.  The intervening spaces
+between these geysers were covered with grass; and in many places trees
+rich with foliage grew luxuriantly, showing that there was no danger in
+venturing among them.
+
+Another beautiful geyser, which burst up when I was not more than a
+hundred yards from it, had the exact appearance of a fan.  On examining
+it, I found that it possessed a double orifice, which discharged five
+radiating jets to the height of sixty feet; the drops of spray as they
+fell perfectly representing the feathers of a fan.  Nothing could be
+more beautiful than the effect.  The eruption lasted nearly thirty
+minutes, the water preserving its elegant form during the whole time.
+About forty feet from it dense masses of vapour ascended from a hole,
+emitting at the same time loud sharp reports.  As I looked along the
+river I saw small craters of every conceivable form; some were
+quiescent, while others poured out cascades forming small rivulets which
+ran into the river.
+
+So beautiful and curious was the scene, that for a time I forgot my
+perilous position.
+
+I had no fear of starving, as long as I had my fishing-line and traps,
+and was able to light a fire; but I knew that I had a wild and rugged
+road to pursue, and probably snow-capped mountains to climb, before I
+could reach the western plains.  It was important, therefore, to obtain
+substantial fare, that I might regain my full strength for the
+undertaking.  I had not, of course, given up all hope of falling in with
+my friends, but still I was forced to contemplate the possibility of
+missing them.  I wondered that we had not yet met, as I certainly
+thought they would have taken the same direction that I had followed.
+
+I must, at all events, spend another night in the valley; and I was
+looking about for some place which would afford me shelter, when I saw,
+a short distance off, what appeared to be a beautiful grotto--consisting
+of fantastic arches, pillars, and turrets, with hollows beneath them, in
+one of which I might find a comfortable sleeping-place.  I determined to
+explore it, and, after collecting wood for a fire, to take my rod and
+line and endeavour to catch some fish in the river.  I should, at all
+events, have no difficulty in cooking them in one of the numerous
+boiling caldrons in the neighbourhood.  Directly behind the grotto was a
+forest of firs, from which I could collect an ample supply of wood for
+my fire, as also small branches to form my couch, should the ground
+prove damp.
+
+I was making my way towards the grotto, when I heard a rumbling sound,
+and directly afterwards two jets of water spouted from its midst--one of
+them rising rapidly to the height of nearly a hundred feet, when,
+spreading out, down it came, the scalding water falling in a dense
+shower on every side, while wreaths of steam were ejected from the
+various holes which had been within their influence, the which would
+speedily have parboiled me, had I not at once run off to a safe
+distance.  I then turned back to look at the beautiful phenomenon.
+Although the jet was not so lofty as many of the other geysers, its form
+was not less beautiful, assuming, as it curled over, the appearance of a
+gigantic ostrich feather.
+
+I had received a lesson not to trust to appearances, and was now very
+unwilling to take up my lodgings in any one of the curious grottoes
+which lay scattered about in the valley.  They might be perfectly quiet,
+and afford me comfortable shelter; or, proving treacherous, a stream of
+hot water might burst forth from some unperceived vent and blow me fifty
+feet into the air, or scald me to death.  I accordingly resolved to
+build myself a bower in which, although it would not afford me so much
+shelter as a cavern, I might pass the night in safety.
+
+It was necessary, however, before the sun should disappear, to light my
+fire; and having fixed upon a spot, I repaired to the woods nearest at
+hand to collect the fuel I had not gone far when I saw rising before me
+a curious white mound, twenty-five or thirty feet in height, and about a
+hundred at the base.  From the summit rose a small puff of steam, like
+that escaping from the lid of a kettle; but I saw, from the appearance
+of the trees around it, that it could not for many years have sent forth
+any dangerous stream of hot water.  Not far off was a small basin with
+an elegantly scalloped rim; it was full of hot water, which scarcely
+bubbled over.  "This will make me a capital fish-kettle," I said to
+myself, "so I will build my hut near here.  I do not think there can be
+any risk."
+
+Having selected a clear spot, I set to work and piled up the wood for my
+fire.  This was the first operation.  I could build my hut in the dusk,
+or even by the light of the fire, should it be necessary, after I had
+caught my fish.  Then taking a handful of moss into the open, with a few
+dry sticks, I quickly lighted it with my burning-glass, and carrying it
+back, soon had my fire in a blaze.  I next made it up carefully, that it
+might burn until I came back, and hurried down to the river.  I was
+doubtful whether trout were to be found in water into which hot streams
+were constantly pouring; however, as most of them became cold before
+they reached the main current, I thought it possible that I might be
+successful.  In the expectation of catching fish, I had omitted to set
+my traps; or rather, occupied by the wonderful scenes around me, I had
+forgotten all about the matter.  In vain I threw in my line, baited with
+an active grasshopper; not a fish would bite.  I went higher up the
+river, where fewer hot springs ran into it, but I was equally
+unsuccessful.
+
+The shadows beginning to spread over the valley warned me that I must
+return to my camping-ground and content myself with a few thistle roots
+for supper; and I had just wound up my line, when my ear caught the
+sound of what appeared to be a shot fired at some distance up the
+valley.  It was so faint, however, that I thought it might possibly be a
+sound emitted by some geyser or fire-hole.  Just then a deer came
+bounding along, a short distance off.  On seeing me it swerved slightly
+out of its course, and as it did so I perceived a stream of blood
+flowing from its side.
+
+"That _was_ a shot, then!"  I exclaimed; "and my friends must have fired
+it."
+
+My first impulse was to run in the direction from whence the shot came,
+but on looking at the deer I perceived that it was slackening its pace;
+and after a few more bounds, down it sank to the ground, not one hundred
+yards from me.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE.
+
+I KILL THE DEER--MORE WONDERS--MEET MANLEY AND SERGEANT CUSTIS AT LAST--
+A PLEASANT EVENING--PARCHED WITH THIRST AMIDST SPARKLING STREAMS--OUR
+HAZARDOUS JOURNEY OVER THE MOUNTAINS--SAFE ARRIVAL AT FORT HARWOOD--
+WELCOMED BY THE COMMANDANT--AN EXPEDITION ORGANISED TO DRIVE THE INDIANS
+FROM THE COUNTRY--MANLEY COMMANDS IT--I ACCOMPANY HIM--MEET BARNEY AND
+KLITZ, STILL BOUND FOR CALIFORNIA--BARNEY GIVES AN ACCOUNT OF THEIR
+ESCAPE--THEIR JOURNEY STOPPED--THEY RETURN WITH US--WE MEET PIOMINGO AND
+HIS SQUAW--TELLS US THAT HE HAS BURIED THE WAR-HATCHET--HEAR AN ALARMING
+ACCOUNT OF BARTLE--ASCEND THE MOUNTAIN TO WHERE WE LEFT UNCLE JEFF--FIND
+HIM AND CLARICE WELL--HE HAS OBTAINED A LARGE SUPPLY OF PELTRIES--OUR
+RETURN TO WINNEMAK'S CAMP--MAYSOTTA ACCOMPANIES CLARICE TO ROARING
+WATER.
+
+Although I had not forgotten the friends I hoped soon to see, my
+instinct as a hunter made me anxious to secure the deer, as it might
+possibly get up again, and be lost to us by springing into the river.
+Acting on this impulse, therefore, I ran up to the wounded animal.  The
+poor brute was endeavouring to rise on its knees, so, ham-stringing it
+with my knife, I effectually prevented it from escaping.  I had,
+however, to approach it cautiously, for a blow from its antlers, even in
+its present state, might prove dangerous.  I managed at length to reach
+its throat, when its struggles speedily ceased.
+
+I now looked round for my friends, in the expectation of seeing them at
+any moment, for I was sure they would follow the deer; but they did not
+come.  Still I could not have been mistaken.  The animal had been shot
+by a rifle bullet; it was a rifle I had heard fired.  Had Indian hunters
+shot the deer, they would certainly have followed more closely at its
+heels; and besides, they were not likely to have rifles.
+
+After having secured the deer, I hastened in the direction from whence
+it had come, expecting that every moment would solve the mystery.  Yet,
+eager as I was, my eyes could not avoid remarking the wonderful objects
+around me.  On one side was a basin, its projecting rim carved with
+marvellously intricate tracery, while the waters within were tinted with
+all the colours of the rainbow.  On the other side appeared a mass
+greatly resembling an ancient castle.  It rose more than forty feet
+above the plain, while in its midst was a turret of still greater
+dimensions.  A succession of steps, formed by the substances in the
+water which had become hardened, led up to it, ornamented with bead and
+shell work; while large masses, shaped like cauliflowers or
+spongy-formed corals, projected from the walls.  Out of this curious
+structure, as I was passing it, shot a column of water sixty feet or
+more in height, vast volumes of steam escaping at the same time.
+
+It seems curious that I should have been able to remark these objects at
+a time when my mind was occupied by a matter of so much importance.
+Still I could not avoid seeing the objects; and although I did not at
+the time think much about them, they stamped their impression on my mind
+as I went along.  Suddenly two figures appeared, which put every other
+object out of my sight.  My eyes were fixed upon them; I had no doubt
+that they were Manley and Sergeant Custis.  I shouted.  They saw and
+heard me, and came hurrying forward, and we were soon warmly shaking
+hands.
+
+"Ralph, my dear fellow! we feared that you were lost," exclaimed Manley,
+"and we have been hunting for you day after day.  How haggard you look!
+How did you manage to lose us? and what has become of your rifle?"
+
+These and numerous other questions I had briefly to answer.  How they
+had missed me, they could not very clearly tell.  Instead, however, of
+coming westward, they had for some time hunted about in the very
+neighbourhood where they had at first lost sight of me.  At length they
+reached one of my camps, and from thence they had followed me up,
+although they had been compelled, as I had, to take shelter during the
+storm.
+
+Of course, they were as much delighted as I was with the extraordinary
+region in which we found ourselves; and I could now enjoy an examination
+of its wonders far more than I did at first.
+
+We were very anxious to push on, in order to carry relief to our
+friends, and to punish the Arrapahas for their audacious raid on our
+territory, but that evening we could proceed no farther.  We therefore
+cut up the deer, and carried as much of its flesh as we required to
+camp, where we built a hut, and employed the evening in preparing the
+venison for the remainder of our journey--for we had snowy heights to
+surmount, where we might be unable to meet with game.  An abundant meal
+and a night's rest completely set me up; and my friends insisting on
+alternately keeping watch, I was allowed to sleep on without
+interruption.
+
+I must pass rapidly over the next few days of our journey.  We worked
+our way along the rugged gorges through which the river forced a
+passage, and we had torrents to cross, precipitous mountains to climb,
+amid glaciers and masses of snow, where by a false step we should have
+been hurled to destruction.  But we were mercifully preserved.
+
+Game in these wild regions is scarce, and we were frequently hard
+pressed for food.  In one of the valleys, at the beginning of this part
+of our journey, nowhere was a drop of drinkable water to be found.  For
+hours we walked on, with bright fountains bubbling up on every side; but
+they were scalding hot, or so impregnated with minerals that we dared
+not touch them.  Our fate promised to be like that of Tantalus: with
+water on every side, we were dying of thirst.  At length I espied, high
+up on the mountain slope, a little green oasis, scarcely larger than a
+small dinner-plate.  I scrambled up to it, and, putting down my hand,
+found a fountain of cool bright water issuing forth.  I shouted to my
+companions, who quickly joined me.  Never was nectar drank with more
+delight; and, revived and strengthened, we again pushed on.
+
+Sometimes we slept in caverns, sometimes in huts built of clods and
+boughs.  Frequently we had to camp on the bare ground, without shelter,
+our feet as close to the fire as we could venture to place them without
+running the risk of their being scorched.
+
+At last, to our great joy, we saw the western plains stretching out
+before us.  I call them the plains, although hills of all heights rose
+in their midst.  Far away to the south-west was the great Salt Lake;
+while in front of us were the mountainous regions bordering the
+Pacific,--California and its newly-discovered gold-mines.  Now
+descending steep slopes, now traversing gorges, now climbing down
+precipices, now following the course of a rapid stream, we ultimately
+reached level ground, and at last arrived at Fort Harwood.
+
+"Why, Broadstreet, my dear fellow!" exclaimed the commandant, who, with
+a number of other officers, came out on seeing us approach, "we had
+given you up as lost!  Some emigrants who escaped from a train which was
+attacked reported that every white man on the other side of the pass,
+for miles to the southward, had been murdered.  They had heard, also,
+that an officer and his men had been cut off, so we naturally concluded
+you were the unhappy individual."
+
+"Such would have been our fate, if we had attempted to get through the
+pass; but, guided by my friend here, we crossed the mountain, for the
+purpose of asking you to send a force of sufficient strength to drive
+back the Indians, with their rascally white allies," answered the
+lieutenant.
+
+"The very thing I purposed doing, if I could obtain a trustworthy
+guide," said the commandant.
+
+"You could not have a more trustworthy one than my friend, Ralph
+Middlemore," answered Manley.  "He knows the mountains better than any
+white man we are likely to find; and as for Indians, I would not put
+confidence in one of them."
+
+Of course, I at once expressed my willingness to undertake the duty
+proposed; and the expedition was speedily arranged.  Our troops may not
+have had a very military appearance, but the men knew how to handle
+their rifles, and had had experience in border warfare.  We numbered
+fifty in all, besides the drivers of the baggage horses and mules
+conveying our provisions and ammunition.  All not absolutely necessary
+encumbrances were dispensed with, our camp equipage consisting of a few
+iron pots, tin cups, and plates.  Lieutenant Broadstreet had command of
+the party, and he was directed to select a fit site for a new fort in
+the neighbourhood of Roaring Water, to assist in holding the Arrapahas
+in check for the future.
+
+Not an hour was lost; and by sunrise, two days after our arrival, we
+commenced our march.  I had advised Manley to let me go ahead with a few
+of the most experienced men, to act as scouts, that we might ascertain
+whether the enemy still held the pass; but two days had gone by without
+any signs of the Indians.  The remains of their fires, however, showed
+that they had been there not long before.  At the end of the second day,
+just as we were about to encamp, I caught sight of two figures coming
+over the brow of a slight elevation.  I rubbed my eyes; was it fancy, or
+did I really see Klitz and Barney before me, precisely as I had seen
+them on a previous occasion, when attempting to make their escape from
+the farm?  No doubt about it.  There was Barney wheeling a barrow, and
+Klitz, with a couple of muskets on his shoulder, marching behind him.
+Had I been inclined to superstition, I might have supposed that I beheld
+a couple of ghosts, or rather beings of another world; but I was
+convinced, unless I was the victim of some optical delusion, that the
+two worthies were there in flesh and blood.
+
+I did what every one should do when there exists any doubt about a
+matter,--I hastened forward to solve the mystery.  No sooner did they
+see me than Klitz dropped his muskets, and Barney, letting go the
+handles of his wheel-barrow, stood gazing at me with open eyes and
+outstretched hands.
+
+"Arrah, now, it's the young masther himself!" exclaimed Barney; whilst
+the German uttered an exclamation which I did not comprehend.  "Sure,
+now, we were afther thinking your honour was kilt intirely," continued
+Barney.  "Might I be so bold as to axe where your honour comes from
+now?"
+
+"Let me inquire where you come from, and how you escaped from the
+burning house," I said.  "Although I am glad to see you, I would rather
+you had rejoined your regiment."
+
+"Sure, Mister Ralph dear, we were returned as dead, and it would have
+been sore against our consciences to take sarvice under the
+circumstances.  But your honour was axin' how we escaped.  Sure, when I
+was hunting for the Redskin spy, didn't I find out the root-house.  And
+so, afther matters came to the worst, we got in there, with food enough
+to last until those thieves who wanted our scalps had taken themselves
+off.  As to cutting our way through the enemy, I knew well enough that
+would not suit me; for I could not run, and Klitz would have been a mark
+a mile off.  So, when you rushed out, he and I dropped down through the
+trap and stowed ourselves away.  The Indians, marcifully, niver came to
+look for us.  In truth, while they were hunting about down came the
+building on their heads, and we could hear their shrieks and cries as
+they tried to scramble out from among the flames.  If it had not been
+for a small vent-hole far away up in a corner, we should have been
+suffocated, maybe.  All day long we could hear them screeching and
+hallooing outside the house; but before night the thieves of the world
+took themselves off, we suppose, for all was silent.
+
+"At the end of a couple of days we thought we might safely venture to
+take a few mouthfuls of fresh air, and begin to work our way out from
+among the ruins.  It was no easy job, but we got free at last.  Neither
+Redskin nor white man was to be seen; and of all the buildings, the hut
+and the mill only were standing.  The villains had carried off all our
+blankets and most of the cooking-pots, but enough was left for our
+wants, seeing that we had nothing to put in them.  However, Klitz was
+not the boy to starve.  He soon caught some fish, and I got hold of a
+sheep which came up to the door; and if there had only been a dhrop of
+the cratur', we should have lived like princes.  One thing there was
+which the Indians had not carried off, and that was a wheel-barrow.
+When Klitz saw it, `We will go to California!' says he.  Says I, `I'm
+the boy for it!'  So, as we had our muskets and a few rounds of
+ammunition, afther drying the mutton and making some other necessary
+preparations we set off.  The Indians had left the country, and no one
+stopped us, so surely your honour won't be so hard as to stop us now!"
+
+"That must depend on what Lieutenant Broadstreet has to say in the
+matter," I observed.  "I am under his orders, and will conduct you to
+him."
+
+Klitz elongated his visage on hearing this, but Barney took the matter
+with his usual good-humour.
+
+In consideration of the dangers the men had gone through, and their
+conduct in the defence of the farm, the lieutenant treated them kindly.
+He could not allow them to continue on their way to California, of
+course, which they most certainly would never have reached, but he
+inflicted no greater punishment than ordering them to mount the
+baggage-mules and return with us.
+
+We did not entirely rely on Barney's report that the Indians had left
+the neighbourhood, though it perhaps made us less cautious than we would
+otherwise have been.  As I was well-mounted, I frequently went on a
+considerable distance ahead, eager to fall in with some one from whom I
+might gain intelligence of Uncle Jeff, Clarice, or our friends.  I did
+not suppose that Uncle Jeff would remain in the mountains where we had
+left him, but that he would certainly have come down to meet us; or
+perhaps, should Bartle and Gideon have escaped, he might have rejoined
+them and returned to Roaring Water.
+
+We had got through the pass, and were about to march to the southward,
+in the hope of overtaking the enemy, should they be still lingering in
+that part of the country, when I saw smoke ascending from the level
+ground close to the foot of the mountain, and some way ahead.  On
+watching it, I was satisfied that it rose from an encampment of white or
+red men.  As there was little doubt that information could be obtained
+from the inhabitants, whoever they were, the sergeant and I, with two
+well-mounted troopers, rode forward, keeping on the alert to guard
+against coming suddenly on an enemy.
+
+As we got nearer, I saw, by means of a telescope which I had obtained at
+the fort, an Indian camp of a more permanent character than I had yet
+fallen in with in that neighbourhood.  This was a proof that the
+inhabitants were friendly.
+
+In a short time several persons appeared; and on seeing us one of them
+came forward, habited in the costume of a chief, a quiver at his back
+and a bow in his hand.  A squaw followed him.  He stopped and gazed at
+me.  Then, as I rode on, he advanced, and, putting out his hand,
+exclaimed--
+
+"You know me!--Piomingo.  This my squaw, you save my life and her life,
+and I am ever your friend."
+
+I told him that I was very glad to see him, and that he could give me
+information I very much desired.  In the course of conversation he
+informed me that he had talked with Winnemak, and had buried, as he
+said, the war-hatchet; and he had therefore come and settled in that
+district.  He had also preserved my horse with the greatest care; and,
+he added, he was ready to restore him to me in good condition.  With
+regard to Uncle Jeff, he could tell me nothing.  As my uncle, however,
+had not rejoined Winnemak, I concluded that the latter was still in the
+mountains, well contented with his new locality, and engaged in shooting
+and trapping.
+
+"Can you give me any information about my other friends?"  I asked.
+
+One white man, he said, had gone to Winnemak's camp; and from his
+description I had little doubt that the person he spoke of was either
+Bartle or Gideon.  I was very sure, however, that either of them would
+without delay have rejoined Uncle Jeff.  What Piomingo told me about the
+other caused me much anxiety.  He had been captured by the Arrapahas, he
+said, who had carried him about with them; probably, according to their
+cruel custom, with the intention of ultimately putting him to death in
+some barbarous manner.
+
+As Piomingo volunteered to lead a party of us in search of the
+marauders, who still had, according to his report, a white man with
+them, I at once accepted his offer, and would gladly have set off
+immediately; but it was important first to carry assistance to Uncle
+Jeff and Clarice, who could not fail--so Manley thought--to require it.
+He and I, with twenty troopers and some of our baggage animals,
+accordingly turned to the northward, leaving Sergeant Custis and the
+remainder of our force to watch the pass, in order to prevent the return
+of the Arrapahas.
+
+We pushed on as fast as our horses would go, the lieutenant being fully
+as eager as I was, but it took as two days to reach the foot of the
+mountains.  Manley declared that he could not have found the spot had it
+not been for my assistance.  We here formed camp, while he and I, with
+six of our strongest baggage animals, and men to look after them, took
+our way up the mountain.
+
+I need scarcely describe the route.  Sometimes we made tolerable
+progress, at other times we had to use the greatest caution to escape
+falling over the precipices which we had now on one side, now on the
+other.  But the most arduous part of the undertaking was forcing our way
+through the primeval forests, over trunks of trees, and through pools of
+water, into which the horses sank up to their knees.  The poor brutes
+had an uncomfortable time of it.  The men, armed with thick sticks, went
+behind whacking them unmercifully, while others dragged away at their
+heads.  I was thankful to have the task of acting as guide, although it
+was not an easy one--having every now and then to climb over fallen logs
+or leap across pools.  I was, however, saved the pain of witnessing the
+sufferings of the animals; and I determined, if possible, to find an
+easier path down again.
+
+At length a height which separated us from the first valley was passed;
+and looking down, to our infinite satisfaction we caught sight of a
+well-constructed hut, with a wreath of smoke ascending from its chimney.
+All, then, was likely to be well.  Manley and I, leaving our men to
+follow with the animals, hurried down, and in less than a quarter of an
+hour we were shaking hands with Uncle Jeff and Clarice.  I need scarcely
+describe how Manley and my fair young sister met, but it was very
+evident that they were not sorry to see each other.  Rachel came out,
+beaming with smiles; and in a short time Pat Sperry appeared, followed
+by another person whom I was truly glad to see--Gideon Tuttle.  The
+latter had joined Uncle Jeff some days before.  Although desperately
+wounded, he had managed to make his escape, and had lain in hiding in
+the mountains for several days, till he had recovered sufficient
+strength to travel.  The report he gave us of Bartle, however, was truly
+alarming.  There could be no doubt that he had been captured by the
+Indians, and, Gideon feared, must have been put to death by them; but
+when I told him what Piomingo said, he became more hopeful as to the
+fate of his old friend.
+
+"If he is alive, we will find him out, wherever he may be!" he
+exclaimed.  "Even if the varmints have him in the middle of their camp,
+we will manage to set him free."
+
+Uncle Jeff, as I expected, had not been idle.  Ever since the day we had
+left him, he had been hunting and trapping, and had collected a large
+store of skins of all sorts of animals, with dried meat enough to supply
+an army.  The baggage animals we had brought could carry but a small
+amount of the stores collected by Uncle Jeff.  It was arranged,
+therefore, that a larger number should be sent up as soon as possible,
+to bring away the remainder.  Who was to take charge of them? was the
+question.  Uncle Jeff, Gideon, and I, were naturally anxious to return
+to Roaring Water, that we might get up huts and re-establish ourselves
+before the commencement of winter.
+
+While we were in this dilemma, Winnemak and several of his braves
+appeared.  On hearing of our difficulty, he said, "Commit them to my
+care.  I will protect them with my life--although I believe no one will
+venture up here to carry them off.  I have, as yet, had few
+opportunities of showing my gratitude.  I failed to assist you, when I
+wished to do so, against the Arrapahas; but in this matter I can, at all
+events, render you a service."
+
+"Where will Maysotta remain while you are up in the mountains?" asked
+Uncle Jeff, after he had accepted Winnemak's offer.
+
+"Oh, let her come with us!" exclaimed Clarice.  "I wish to show her that
+I am grateful for the service which she rendered me; and she may perhaps
+be pleased with the life we lead.  She has several times expressed a
+wish to know how white people spend their time."
+
+The chief, who seldom interfered with the movements of his daughter,
+replied that she was at liberty to do as she wished, and that we should
+find her in the camp at the foot of the mountains.
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet had to rejoin his men as soon as possible, and no
+time, therefore, was lost in commencing our journey down the mountain.
+Winnemak and several of his people were left in charge of Uncle Jeff's
+hut and stores.
+
+We had not a few difficulties to encounter on our return, but Clarice,
+by whose side Manley rode whenever the path would permit, endured them
+bravely; and we ultimately, without accident, reached the foot of the
+mountains, where we found Maysotta encamped with the remainder of her
+people.  She was well pleased with the proposal Clarice made to her; and
+her baggage being put into little bulk, she mounted her horse and
+accompanied us forthwith.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN.
+
+ON OUR WAY WE VISIT PIOMINGO--HE TELLS US OF BARTLE'S CAPTIVITY, AND
+OFFERS TO ASSIST US IN HIS RECOVERY--GIDEON, PIOMINGO, AND I SET OUT,
+FOLLOWED BY A STRONG PARTY UNDER SERGEANT CUSTIS--WE DISCOVER THE TRAIL,
+AND FOLLOW IT UP--HORRIBLE CRUELTIES PRACTISED BY INDIANS ON THEIR
+PRISONERS--THE TRAIL LEADS ALONG THE MOUNTAIN--WE SEE A FIGURE ABOVE
+US--IT IS BARTLE--IS HE ALIVE?--JUST IN TIME--GIDEON AND I STAY BY HIM--
+I AFTERWARDS SET OFF TO OBTAIN HELP--PIOMINGO HAS SENT A LETTER--WE
+ARRIVE SAFE AT ROARING WATER--HARD AT WORK REBUILDING THE HOUSE--A FORT
+ESTABLISHED--BARNEY AND KLITZ JOIN US--A VISIT FROM MANLEY--A PROPOSAL,
+AND CONFESSION--UNCLE JEFF APPROVES OF THE ENGAGEMENT OF MANLEY AND
+CLARICE--WINNEMAK AND PIOMINGO BECOME CHRISTIANS, AND INSTRUCT THEIR
+PEOPLE--THE HOUSE REBUILT--SETTLERS GATHER ROUND US, AND UNCLE JEFF'S
+FARM BECOMES THE MOST FLOURISHING IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD.
+
+As we approached Piomingo's camp, or rather village, we saw him hurrying
+out to meet us.
+
+"I have gained information for you," he said, "about one of your white
+friends who has long been held in captivity by the Arrapahas.  The party
+who have him remained for some time in the neighbourhood of Roaring
+Water, if they are not there still.  If you hasten on, you may overtake
+them; but it would be dangerous to approach with a large band, in case
+they should immediately kill their prisoner--they have already killed
+several who had fallen into their power--rather than run the risk of
+allowing him to escape.  My advice is, that a small number of
+experienced men should pursue them, followed by a larger party at a
+short distance; and I willingly offer to serve as a scout to accompany
+the first party.  If we can find the Arrapahas in camp, we may be able
+to liberate the prisoner; or if we can form an ambush and pounce
+suddenly out on them, we may manage to cut the thongs with which he is
+bound, mount him on one of our horses, and carry him off."
+
+As we were convinced that the white man of whom Piomingo spoke was
+Bartle Won, Uncle Jeff and Gideon accepted the brave's offer without
+hesitation.  It was finally settled that Piomingo, Gideon, and I should
+push on until we came upon the trail of the Arrapahas, and that a party
+of twenty men, under Sergeant Custis, should follow us.  We were then
+cautiously to approach the camp of the enemy, and endeavour by some
+means or other to liberate Bartle.  We had confidence in the success of
+our plan, for Piomingo had ever been celebrated for his cunning and
+audacity, which he had in times past exercised in less reputable ways
+than that in which he now proposed to employ them.  Some of Winnemak and
+Piomingo's people, who were now on good terms, scoured the country as
+scouts; and from the reports they brought us we were satisfied that the
+chief body of the enemy had completely deserted the neighbourhood.
+Still, the party of whom Piomingo had heard might have remained behind,
+and we therefore at once commenced our search for their trail.
+
+But I must be brief in my account.  For two days we searched in every
+direction, scarcely resting, till at length we discovered a trail which
+Piomingo was confident was that of our foes; and, moreover, he said they
+had a white man with them.  They had, however, he thought, passed some
+days before.  Piomingo sent back one of his men to urge Sergeant Custis
+to come on rapidly; and we pushed forward as fast as we could travel,
+hoping soon to overtake the Arrapahas.
+
+After following the trail, we found that it took the way along the
+mountains.  This was rather an advantage in some respects, as, being
+accustomed to mountain travelling, we might move on faster than those of
+whom we were in pursuit.  As, however, we were made of flesh and blood,
+we were obliged to encamp at night, although the dawn of day found us
+again in pursuit.
+
+Piomingo thrilled my heart with horror by an account which he gave of
+the cruelties practised by the savages on some of their captives, and I
+had great fear that our friend Bartle might have been subjected to the
+same horrible tortures.  Piomingo told us that he himself had been
+present at some of the scenes he described.  It showed me how debased
+men, formed in the image of God, can become, when they have departed
+from Him, and how cruel by nature is the human heart, which can devise
+and take satisfaction in the infliction of such barbarities.  The white
+men who were thus treated had done nothing to injure the Indians, except
+in attempting to defend their lives and property when attacked.  The
+captives having been brought out into an open space, bound hand and
+foot, the Indians threw off their usual garments, and dressed themselves
+in the most fantastic manner.  One of their victims was first led
+forward and stretched on the ground, to which he was bound by cords and
+pegs, so that he could move none of his limbs.  The savages then
+commenced a wild dance round him, jeering and mocking him, while they
+described the various tortures for which he must be prepared.  One of
+the unfortunate victim's companions was, in the meantime, held, with his
+hands bound behind him, and made a witness to his sufferings.  The
+savages, as they danced round and round him, stooped down and pricked
+him with daggers and knives, taking good care not to wound him mortally.
+Next one of the wretches, seizing his knife, cut his scalp from off his
+head; while others brought some burning embers of wood and placed them
+on his breast.
+
+But I see no advantage in further mentioning the diabolical cruelties
+practised by these savages of which Piomingo told us.  Far removed from
+the benign influences of Christianity, these red men only acted
+according to the impulses of their barbarous nature.  The thought came
+upon me with great force, Is it not the duty of white men who are
+Christians to send the blessed light of the gospel, by every means in
+their power, to their benighted fellow-creatures?  They have souls as we
+have, and they are as capable of receiving the truths of the gospel as
+we are.  Bold, energetic men, imbued with the love of souls, are
+required, who, ready to sacrifice all the enjoyments of civilisation,
+will cast themselves fearlessly among the native tribes, and by patience
+and perseverance endeavour to induce them to listen to the message of
+reconciliation, and to imitate the example of Him who died for them.
+
+I spoke earnestly and faithfully to Piomingo of this, and I was thankful
+to find that he listened not only willingly but eagerly to what I said.
+
+"Yes," he exclaimed at length, "I see that you are right.  Although some
+white men have set us a bad example, it is no reason that all should do
+so.  The truths about which you speak are independent of man.  There
+must be bad white men as well as bad red men; but I am sure that those
+who follow the example of Him of whom you tell me, the Son of the Great
+Spirit, must be good men.  I will try to follow him, and when we get
+back, you must tell me more about him."
+
+I gladly promised to do so, and was thankful for this opportunity of
+speaking to Piomingo.
+
+Before starting next morning we sent a message to the sergeant, begging
+him to keep as close to the foot of the mountain as possible, as we were
+sure the enemy could not have gone far up; indeed, their trail led along
+the lower part of the side.  They had taken this direction, probably, in
+order that they might obtain a view over the plain, and thus the more
+easily escape from those who by this time, they must have known through
+their scouts, were in pursuit of them, although they could not be aware
+that our small party was so close at their heels.  In a few hours more,
+we believed, we should probably be up with them; and we hoped that while
+they were in camp we might find some means or other of releasing Bartle.
+
+Though generally keeping our eyes ahead, or down on the plain, I
+happened on one occasion to look up the mountain.  On the height above
+me was the figure of a human being.  I pointed it out to my companions.
+
+"There is no doubt about it," exclaimed Gideon; "what you see is a
+cross, with a man, well-nigh stripped, bound to it."
+
+The spot was one difficult of access, but it had been reached shortly
+before, and, Piomingo declared, by Indians, whose trail he discovered on
+the hard rock, where Gideon and I could not perceive the slightest
+marks.
+
+"That is Bartle," cried Gideon as we were climbing on.  "Little chance,
+however, of the poor fellow being alive.  The cruel varmints!  I'll
+punish them one of these days for what they have done."
+
+The expressions which his indignation drew forth were very natural, but
+they were not in accordance with the precepts I had been endeavouring to
+inculcate on Piomingo.
+
+As we hastened on Gideon cried, "I think I saw his head move; if so, he
+must be alive.  We are coming! cheer up, cheer up, Bartle; we are coming
+to your help!" he shouted.
+
+The faint sound of a human voice was heard in return.
+
+"He is alive," I exclaimed; "he is alive!" and I waved my cap as we
+rushed to our friend's assistance.
+
+Another minute, and we were by Bartle's side.  We could perceive no
+wound, but his eyes were starting from his head, and his tongue
+protruded.  Not a moment was lost in cutting the lashings with which he
+was bound to the stump of a small tree, with another rough piece of wood
+fastened across it.  A few minutes later, and I believe he would have
+breathed his last.  We had fortunately brought with us a bottle of water
+and some spirits, some of which we poured down his throat, and in a
+wonderfully short time he revived, and was able to tell us what had
+happened to him.  He had rendered one of his captors a service on some
+occasion, and this man had sufficient influence with the others to
+preserve his life.  When, however, they found themselves closely pursued
+by our troops, they were about to kill him; but, at the instigation of
+the brave who had hitherto saved him from being put to death, they
+resolved to bind him to the tree and leave him.  In all likelihood, his
+friend had proposed this with the intention of afterwards returning and
+setting him free.
+
+As Bartle would certainly be unable to move for some time, Gideon and I
+remained by him, while Piomingo returned to inform Sergeant Custis of
+our success, and also to warn him that the enemy were not far ahead.
+The sergeant, we afterwards heard, pushed rapidly on, and in a short
+time came up with the party, and, by the careful way in which he
+approached, took them completely by surprise.  They attempted to defend
+themselves, but the greater number were cut to pieces--a few only
+escaping to the southward.
+
+Gideon and I, I have said, had been left on the mountain-side to look
+after Bartle.  The first thing Gideon did was to take off his own coat
+and wrap it round our friend, whose limbs were swollen by the pressure
+of the cords, while he was chilled by long exposure to the cold air;
+indeed, most men would have sunk under the sufferings he had endured.
+How were we to get him down the mountain? was the next question.  He
+could not walk, and Gideon and I together were unable to carry him.  The
+spot was exposed to a hot sun by day, and to cold winds by night, and
+there were no materials at hand to build a hut; indeed, but little wood
+even to form a fire.  At last I proposed setting off to try and obtain
+help,--though, should the troops or the Indians who accompanied us have
+gone south, it might be a long time before I could fall in with any one.
+There was nothing else to be done, however, as far as we could see,
+although I greatly feared that before I could return Bartle would have
+succumbed.
+
+"Quick, Ralph," said Gideon, as I rose to set off.  "Do not forget some
+food; and bring a litter, or something of that kind, to carry Bartle
+on."
+
+I had scarcely got a hundred feet down the mountain when I saw two
+Indians in the distance, coming towards me, each carrying something on
+his back, and a long pole in his hand.  I waved to them, and they made
+signals in reply.  They were soon close to me, and on coming up they
+said that they had been sent by Piomingo, and that they carried
+materials for forming a litter.  He had thought of the very thing we
+required.  It was rapidly put together; and placing Bartle on it, we
+each of us took the end of a pole, and began cautiously to descend the
+mountain.  Of necessity our progress was very slow.  Sometimes we had to
+place the litter on the ground, not for the sake of resting ourselves,
+but that we might lower it with more caution.  Thus proceeding, we at
+last reached the plain, where, as the day had closed, we encamped.
+
+Next morning, Bartle, although better, was still unable to walk; we
+therefore carried him the whole way to Roaring Water.  We found Uncle
+Jeff standing in the midst of the ruins of the old house,--in no
+desponding mood, however,--and he welcomed Bartle as he would have done
+a beloved brother.
+
+"You will soon come round, Bartle," he said, as he took his hand; "and
+we will get a house up as big and as strong as the old one."
+
+"Ay! that we will," answered Bartle; "and if the Redskins pay us another
+visit, we will take good care that they shall never get inside it."
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The hut had been thoroughly cleaned out, and Clarice, Maysotta, and
+Rachel had taken possession of it, while the rest of the party occupied
+the mill.
+
+Lieutenant Broadstreet had, in the meantime, fixed on a good site for a
+fort on the summit of a precipice by the river-side, and his men were
+busily engaged in cutting and filing up the palisades which were to
+surround it.  So much was he occupied in the duty he had to perform,
+that he could rarely come over to Roaring Water; while I was so fully
+employed that I had no time to visit him.
+
+We were greatly in want of labourers to supply the places of the poor
+fellows who had been killed when the Indians attacked the house, and at
+last Uncle Jeff told me to go over to the fort and ascertain if any men
+were likely to obtain their discharge, and if so, to offer them good
+wages.
+
+"You can tell the lieutenant that we shall be glad to see him over here
+whenever he can come," said Uncle Jeff, "although we have not the best
+accommodation in the world to offer him."
+
+I had little doubt that Manley would not be influenced by the latter
+consideration; so, mounting my horse, I rode off to the fort, and gave
+him Uncle Jeff's message.
+
+"I can afford you two hands, at all events," he answered, and I saw a
+twinkle in his eyes.  "They know the place, and perhaps you may get more
+work out of them than I can; only take care they do not run away."
+
+I guessed to whom he alluded; nor was I mistaken.  We went out together,
+and he summoned Klitz and Barney, who were slowly working away with
+pick, axe, and spade.
+
+"Men," he said, "you have claimed your discharge; you shall have it, if
+you are willing to go and take service at Roaring Water."
+
+"Sure, with the greatest pleasure in me life; there's not a finer
+gintleman on this side of the Atlantic than Mr Crockett," said Barney.
+
+Klitz simply gave a grunt of acquiescence.
+
+The whole matter was arranged; and they were to return with me the next
+day.  I was also glad to obtain two more men, who, though they belonged
+to that class of individuals known, as "Uncle Sam's bad bargains," and
+might be lazy rascals when labouring for a Government for which they did
+not care a cent, turned out to be very ready to serve a master who
+treated them kindly and paid them well.  As we travelled along they
+showed no inclination to decamp, but chatted and laughed, each in his
+own style--Barney being undoubtedly the leading wit of the party.  They
+were heartily welcome at Roaring Water, and both Klitz and Barney showed
+that they were willing and able to work.  The only thing which seemed to
+put the German out was when any allusion was made to a wheel-barrow.
+
+We had just begun active operations when Winnemak came to see his
+daughter.  Maysotta, however, had no inclination to return with him, and
+begged that she might remain to assist her new friend, from whom she was
+hearing more wonderful things daily, as well as gaining more knowledge.
+Winnemak offered us the services of some of his men, who were willing to
+work for wages; and although they were not equal to the worst of the
+white men, yet, by Uncle Jeff's good management, they were made very
+useful.
+
+From some passing emigrant trains we obtained a good supply of tools,--
+axes and saws,--and we were busily at work from sunrise to sunset.
+Clarice and Rachel had succeeded in recovering some of the cattle, pigs,
+and poultry which had strayed, and in a short time the farm began to
+assume something of its former appearance.
+
+I had, one afternoon, come back from the forest in which we obtained our
+timber, in order to get a fresh axe in place of one which I had broken,
+when I found Maysotta alone in the hut.  On asking for Clarice, I was
+told she had gone to the cool fountain for a pitcher of water.  It
+struck me that something was amiss with the Indian girl, but what it was
+I could not tell I was going on to the mill, where I expected to find an
+axe, when Maysotta added--
+
+"The young white chief, from the fort out there, came here just now
+inquiring for you.  When he heard that Clarice was at the spring, he
+hastened off in that direction, without seeming to regard me."
+
+Having obtained the axe, I set off after Manley, whom I was anxious to
+see, and as I got near the spring I heard him in conversation with my
+sister.
+
+"Oh no, no!  I must not leave my uncle and Ralph; I should be neglecting
+my duty, should I do so," said Clarice.
+
+"But I have told you how devotedly, how fondly I love you," said Manley.
+"Do you not love me in return?"
+
+"Yes, I do; I have loved no one else," she replied.
+
+On hearing this confession I should have withdrawn, for I had perfect
+confidence in Manley, and what I had heard gave me unbounded
+satisfaction.  Clarice, however, had heard me moving among the bushes,
+and turned her eyes towards me with a startled look.  I was sure she had
+perceived me, so I at once came forward.  Manley put out his hand.
+
+"You heard what I said to your sister?"
+
+"Yes; and what she said in reply," I answered.  "It gives me the
+greatest possible pleasure.  There is no man I ever met whom I should so
+much like as a brother-in-law.  I would advise Clarice to tell Uncle
+Jeff at once, and hear what he says about the matter.  My belief is,
+that he will not say anything which either of you would dislike."
+
+Dear little Clarice looked very happy when I said this.  I was not
+surprised that Manley had fallen desperately in love with her, although
+her beauty certainly did not depend on the elegance of her costume, for
+she had come out without shoes or stockings, with her hair hanging down
+over her shoulders, and in her rough working-dress.  I must confess I
+forgot all about my axe, and where I had been going; and having been
+taken into the confidence of Manley and my sister, I remained talking
+with them, and settling plans for the future.  Suddenly, however, I
+recollected that I had work to do; and I had an idea that the young
+couple would not object just then to my attending to my duties.  At all
+events, they said nothing to detain me.  Manley agreed to remain with us
+that night, and I advised him to lose no time in speaking to Uncle Jeff.
+
+To make a long story short, when Uncle Jeff came back after his day's
+work, Manley, following my advice, spoke to him.  His reply was what I
+had expected:--
+
+"You shall have her with all my heart, for I am very sure you will make
+her a good husband."
+
+Manley had received his appointment as commandant of the fort; but as
+the buildings were not as yet fully completed, nor would be fit for a
+lady's reception during the winter, it was settled that the young couple
+should wait until next spring to be married, when it was hoped that the
+chaplain at Fort Harwood would be able to come over and perform the
+ceremony.
+
+Before the winter set in we had got up a sufficient portion of the house
+for our accommodation, while the new field hands occupied the hut.  Our
+friend Winnemak paid us frequent visits, too, always bringing a supply
+of game, which was very welcome, as we had but little time for hunting,
+and were unwilling to kill any of our farm-stock.
+
+Maysotta had always much to say to her father, and he willingly allowed
+her to remain with us.  His mind was already beginning to awaken to
+spiritual truth, as he had had the gospel explained to him, and he now
+compared it with the dark heathen superstitions in which he had hitherto
+believed.  Maysotta entreated Clarice to tell her father all she had
+told her.  She gladly did so, and the hitherto proud chief "became as a
+little child."  He at last fixed his camp in our neighbourhood, and used
+to visit us nearly every day, in order that he might receive
+instruction.  He even expressed a wish to learn to read; so Uncle Jeff
+and I became his masters, aided occasionally by Clarice and Maysotta,
+who had already made considerable progress.  The chief's memory was
+wonderfully good, too, and he thus rapidly learned whole chapters of the
+Bible, from a translation which we had obtained in the dialect of his
+people.  His great desire was now not only to learn himself, but to
+induce his own people to accept the blessings of the gospel; and as his
+wish was to imitate us in everything, he had put up a log-house of
+considerable size in his village.
+
+I had often promised to pay him a visit.  One Sunday I had ridden over
+to the fort, after Clarice's marriage, to see her and join the service
+there, when on my way back I bethought me of my promise to Winnemak.  I
+accordingly rode to his village.  None of his men were about; so,
+fastening up my horse, I went towards his house.  As I looked in at the
+door, I saw him standing up at one end, while his chief men and braves
+were seated around him, attentively listening to the words which fell
+from his lips.  Once he would have addressed them only on some warlike
+or political matter, but now he was preaching the blessed gospel, while
+those fierce warriors sat listening with the most profound attention to
+his words.
+
+What were those words?  He was telling them that they must become as
+children; that they must be born again, that their old evil nature might
+be overcome; that they must do good to their enemies, and forgive those
+who should injure them; that they must lead pure and holy lives, not
+giving way to their angry feelings, or even indulging in angry thoughts.
+He told them, too, of the Saviour's love, and the Saviour's death; how
+God would forgive their sins, which, though red as scarlet, would become
+white as wool, if they trusted that by that death he had taken their
+sins upon himself, and had become their Saviour, their Advocate, their
+great High Priest.
+
+Winnemak having thus become a Christian, did not rest content until he
+had used every effort to convert the whole of his tribe.  Nor did he
+stop here: he went to other tribes; and when he found his own influence
+was not sufficient, he procured the assistance of white missionaries,
+whom he supported and protected.
+
+His example was followed by his former enemy Piomingo, whose young wife
+and himself became industrious settlers--the greater number of their
+tribe completely abandoning their old barbarous customs.  The only
+regret of Winnemak was that he and his people had not received these
+glorious tidings in earlier days, before they had almost ceased to exist
+as a people in the land where once their warriors were counted by
+thousands.
+
+But I have been anticipating events.  From several of the emigrant
+trains which came by next season, we obtained not only such stores as we
+required, but several useful hands; while many of the families, seeing
+the fertility of the country, and the progress we had made, to say
+nothing of the protection of the military post, resolved, instead of
+incurring the dangers of a longer journey, to settle in our
+neighbourhood.
+
+The new house, as Uncle Jeff and Bartle intended, was far superior to
+the old one, and although we hoped that we should never again be
+attacked, yet it was built with an eye to defence, and was considered
+almost as strong as the fort itself.  Happily, however, we have never
+had occasion to try its capabilities of withstanding a siege.
+
+Fields were added to fields; the stock increased; and God prospering us
+notwithstanding the heavy losses we had incurred, Uncle Jeff's farm
+eventually became the most nourishing in the neighbourhood.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's In the Rocky Mountains, by W. H. G. Kingston
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 21466.txt or 21466.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/4/6/21466/
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.